Mitsubishi Electric FR-F700 Instruction manual

F700_kisoCOVERTOC.fm
1 ページ
２００９年９月１７日　木曜日　午後３時４７分
INVERTER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
FR-F720-0.75K to 110K
FR-F740-0.75K to 560K
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.
This Instruction Manual (basic) is intended for users who "just want to run the inverter".
If you are going to utilize functions and performance, refer to the Instruction Manual (applied) [IB-0600177ENG].
The Instruction Manual (applied) is separately available from where you purchased the inverter or your Mitsubishi
sales representative.
INVERTER
CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
FR-F700
IB(NA)-0600176ENG-H(0909)MEE Printed in Japan
MODEL
FR-F700
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
MODEL
CODE
1A2-P13
Specifications subject to change without notice.
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
H
5
6
7
PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION ..............................1
INSTALLATION AND WIRING ......................................................................2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Peripheral devices .....................................................................................................3
Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover............................................5
Installation of the inverter and instructions................................................................7
Wiring.........................................................................................................................8
Connection of stand-alone option units...................................................................28
Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) .................................................................36
Precautions for use of the inverter ..........................................................................37
Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter .......................................................39
DRIVE THE MOTOR ....................................................................................40
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Step of operation .....................................................................................................40
Operation panel (FR-DU07) ....................................................................................41
Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9) .........................................46
When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3) ....................................................47
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode) ......................................48
Start and stop using terminals (External operation)................................................57
ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................65
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
Simple mode parameter list.....................................................................................65
Increasing the starting torque (Pr. 0).......................................................................66
Limiting the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)......................67
Changing acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8) ....................................68
Energy saving operation (Pr. 60).............................................................................69
Selection of the operation command and frequency command locations (Pr. 79).71
Parameter clear, all parameter clear.......................................................................72
Parameter copy and parameter verification ............................................................73
Parameter list...........................................................................................................75
700
TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................................................102
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Reset method of protective function......................................................................102
List of fault or alarm display...................................................................................103
Causes and corrective actions ..............................................................................104
Correspondences between digital and actual characters .....................................115
Check and clear of the faults history .....................................................................116
Check first when you have a trouble .....................................................................118
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION......................125
6.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Inspection item.......................................................................................................125
SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................134
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Rating.....................................................................................................................134
Common specifications .........................................................................................136
Outline dimension drawings ..................................................................................138
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure ...........................................................149
7
This Instruction Manual (Basic) provides handling information and precautions for use of the equipment.
Please forward this Instruction Manual (Basic) to the end user.
2. Fire Prevention
This section is specifically about safety matters
WARNING
Incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in death or severe
injury.
CAUTION
Incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in medium or slight
injury, or may cause only material damage.
CAUTION level may even lead to a serious consequence
The
according to conditions. Both instruction levels must be followed
because these are important to personal safety.
1. Electric Shock Prevention
WARNING
• While power is ON or when the inverter is running, do not open
the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• Do not run the inverter with the front cover or wiring cover
removed.
Otherwise you may access the exposed high-voltage terminals
or the charging part of the circuitry and get an electric shock.
• Even if power is off, do not remove the front cover except for
wiring or periodic inspection. You may access the charged
inverter circuits and get an electric shock.
• Before wiring, inspection or switching EMC filter ON/OFF
connector, power must be switched OFF. To confirm that, LED
indication of the operation panel must be checked. (It must be
OFF.) Any person who is involved in wiring, inspection or
switching EMC filter ON/OFF connector shall wait for at least
10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF and
check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the
like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time
after power OFF, and it is dangerous.
• This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding)
must conform to the requirements of national and local safety
regulations and electrical code (NEC section 250, IEC 536
class 1 and other applicable standards).
A neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400V
class inverter in compliance with EN standard must be used.
• Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this
equipment shall be fully competent to do the work.
• The inverter must be installed before wiring. Otherwise you
may get an electric shock or be injured.
• Setting dial and key operations must be performed with dry
hands to prevent an electric shock. Otherwise you may get an
electric shock.
• Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress,
heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise you may get an electric
shock.
• Do not replace the cooling fan while power is on. It is
dangerous to replace the cooling fan while power is on.
• Do not touch the printed circuit board with wet hands. You may
get an electric shock.
• When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259
Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC voltage is
applied to the motor for 1s at powering off. Never touch the
motor terminal, etc. right after powering off to prevent an
electric shock.
CAUTION
• Inverter must be installed on a nonflammable wall without
holes (so that nobody touches the inverter heatsink on the rear
side, etc.). Mounting it to or near flammable material can cause
a fire.
• If the inverter has become faulty, the inverter power must be
switched OFF. A continuous flow of large current could cause a
fire.
• Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+ and
N/-. Doing so could cause a fire.
3. Injury Prevention
CAUTION
• The voltage applied to each terminal must be the ones
specified in the Instruction Manual. Otherwise burst, damage,
etc. may occur.
• The cables must be connected to the correct terminals.
Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may occur.
• Polarity must be correct. Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may
occur.
• While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not
touch the inverter since the inverter will be extremely hot.
Doing so can cause burns.
4. Additional Instructions
Also the following points must be noted to prevent an accidental failure,
injury, electric shock, etc.
(1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
• The product must be transported in correct method that
corresponds to the weight. Failure to do so may lead to injuries.
• Do not stack the boxes containing inverters higher than the
number recommended.
• The product must be installed to the position where withstands
the weight of the product according to the information in the
Instruction Manual.
• Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or has
parts missing. This can result in breakdowns.
• When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or
setting dial; it may fall off or fail.
• Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product.
• The inverter mounting orientation must be correct.
• Foreign conductive bodies must be prevented to enter the
inverter. That includes screws and metal fragments or other
flammable substance such as oil.
• As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject
it to impact.
• The inverter must be used under the following environment:
Otherwise the inverter may be damaged.
Environment
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter
until you have read through this Instruction Manual (Basic) and
appended documents carefully and can use the equipment
correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge
of the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this
Instruction Manual (Basic), the safety instruction levels are
classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Surrounding air
temperature
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature
Atmosphere
Altitude, vibration
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to +65°C *1
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable
gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Maximum 1000m above sea level for
standard operation. 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to
55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes) *2
*1 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
*2 2.9m/s2 or less for the 185K or more.
A-1
(2) Wiring
CAUTION
• Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge
suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side.
These devices on the inverter output side may be overheated
or burn out.
• The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the
motor affects the rotation direction of the motor.
(3) Test operation and adjustment
CAUTION
• Before starting operation, each parameter must be confirmed
and adjusted. A failure to do so may cause some machines to
make unexpected motions.
(4) Operation
WARNING
• Any person must stay away from the equipment when the retry
function is set as it will restart suddenly after trip.
• Since pressing
•
•
•
•
key may not stop output depending on
the function setting status, separate circuit and switch that
make an emergency stop (power OFF, mechanical brake
operation for emergency stop, etc.) must be provided.
OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before
resetting the inverter fault. Resetting inverter alarm with the
start signal ON restarts the motor suddenly.
The inverter must be used for three-phase induction motors.
Connection of any other electrical equipment to the inverter
output may damage the equipment.
Do not modify the equipment.
Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this
manual. Doing so may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.
CAUTION
• The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee
protection of the motor from overheating. It is recommended to
install both an external thermal and PTC thermistor for
overheat protection.
• Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for
frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. Otherwise the life of
the inverter decreases.
• The effect of electromagnetic interference must be reduced by
using a noise filter or by other means. Otherwise nearby
electronic equipment may be affected.
• Appropriate measures must be taken to suppress harmonics.
Otherwise power supply harmonics from the inverter may heat/
damage the power factor correction capacitor and generator.
• When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, the motor
must be an insulation-enhanced motor or measures must be
taken to suppress surge voltage. Surge voltage attributable to
the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals,
deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
• When parameter clear or all parameter clear is performed, the
required parameters must be set again before starting
operations because all parameters return to the initial value.
• The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before
changing its setting, the performances of the motor and
machine must be fully examined.
• Stop status cannot be hold by the inverter's brake function. In
addition to the inverter's brake function, a holding device must
be installed to ensure safety.
• Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long
period, inspection and test operation must be performed.
• For prevention of damage due to static electricity, nearby metal
must be touched before touching this product to eliminate
static electricity from your body.
A-2
(5) Emergency stop
CAUTION
• A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be
provided to prevent hazardous condition to the machine and
equipment in case of inverter failure.
• When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, the wiring
must be checked for fault (short circuit), and internal parts of
the inverter for a damage, etc. The cause of the trip must be
identified and removed before turning ON the power of the
breaker.
• When any protective function is activated, appropriate
corrective action must be taken, and the inverter must be reset
before resuming operation.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
CAUTION
• Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the
control circuit of the inverter. It will cause a failure.
(7) Disposing of the inverter
CAUTION
• The inverter must be treated as industrial waste.
General instructions
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this Instruction Manual
(basic) show the inverter without a cover or partially open for
explanation. Never operate the inverter in this manner. The
cover must be always reinstalled and the instruction in this
Instruction Manual (basic) must be followed when operating the
inverter.
1
PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION
1
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Peripheral devices...................................................................................................... 3
Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover............................................. 5
Installation of the inverter and instructions................................................................. 7
Wiring.......................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.4.10
2.5
Connection of stand-alone option units.................................................................... 28
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.6
2.7
2.8
3
Terminal connection diagram .................................................................................................... 8
EMC filter ................................................................................................................................... 9
Specification of main circuit terminal ....................................................................................... 10
Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring ......... 10
Control circuit terminals ........................................................................................................... 19
Changing the control logic ....................................................................................................... 22
Wiring of control circuit ............................................................................................................ 24
When connecting the operation panel using a connection cable ............................................ 26
RS-485 terminal block ............................................................................................................. 27
Communication operation........................................................................................................ 27
Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2) ................................................................................... 28
Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5) ....................................................................... 30
Connection of the brake unit (BU type) ................................................................................... 32
Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC/MT-HC)............................................. 32
Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)(55K or less) ................... 34
Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC) (75K or more) .............................. 35
Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL) ............................................ 35
Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) .................................................................. 36
Precautions for use of the inverter ........................................................................... 37
Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter ........................................................ 39
DRIVE THE MOTOR
3.1
3.2
Step of operation ...................................................................................................... 40
Operation panel (FR-DU07) ..................................................................................... 41
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.3
3.4
3.5
40
Parts of the operation panel (FR-DU07) .................................................................................. 41
Basic operation (factory setting) .............................................................................................. 42
Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s)) ...................................................... 43
Monitoring of output current and output voltage ...................................................................... 44
First priority monitor ................................................................................................................. 44
Setting dial push ...................................................................................................................... 44
Changing the parameter setting value..................................................................................... 45
Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9) .......................................... 46
When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3) ..................................................... 47
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)....................................... 48
3.5.1
Setting the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz) ...................... 48
I
CONTENTS
— CONTENTS —
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.6
Start and stop using terminals (External operation)................................................. 57
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
4
Setting the frequency by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3) ....................................................... 57
Setting the frequency by switches (three-speed setting) (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6) ................................. 59
Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input) ............................................................. 61
Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum voltage
input (5V, initial value) ............................................................................................................ 62
Setting the frequency by analog input (current input) .............................................................. 63
Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum current input
(at 20mA, initial value) ............................................................................................................. 64
ADJUSTMENT
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Parameter copy ....................................................................................................................... 73
Parameter verification.............................................................................................................. 74
Parameter list ....................................................................................................... 75
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
5
Energy saving operation mode (setting "4") ............................................................................ 69
Optimum excitation control mode (setting "9")......................................................................... 69
Selection of the operation command and frequency command locations (Pr. 79).. 71
Parameter clear, all parameter clear.................................................................... 72
Parameter copy and parameter verification ......................................................... 73
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.9
List of parameters classified by the purpose ........................................................................... 75
Display of the extended parameters ........................................................................................ 77
Parameter list .......................................................................................................................... 78
TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
65
Simple mode parameter list ..................................................................................... 65
Increasing the starting torque (Pr. 0)........................................................................ 66
Limiting the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2) ...................... 67
Changing acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)..................................... 68
Energy saving operation (Pr. 60) ............................................................................. 69
4.5.1
4.5.2
102
Reset method of protective function....................................................................... 102
List of fault or alarm display.................................................................................... 103
Causes and corrective actions ............................................................................... 104
Correspondences between digital and actual characters...................................... 115
Check and clear of the faults history .................................................................. 116
Check first when you have a trouble...................................................................... 118
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
II
Using the setting dial like a potentiometer at the operation..................................................... 50
Setting the frequency by switches (three-speed setting) ......................................................... 51
Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input) ............................................................. 53
Setting the frequency by analog input (current input) .............................................................. 55
Motor does not start............................................................................................................... 118
Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise........................................................... 120
Inverter generates abnormal noise........................................................................................ 120
Motor generates heat abnormally .......................................................................................... 120
Motor rotates in the opposite direction .................................................................................. 121
6
Speed greatly differs from the setting .................................................................................... 121
Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth ................................................................................ 121
Speed varies during operation............................................................................................... 122
Operation mode is not changed properly .............................................................................. 122
Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating............................................................. 123
Motor current is too large....................................................................................................... 123
Speed does not accelerate .................................................................................................... 124
Unable to write parameter setting.......................................................................................... 124
Power lamp is not lit .............................................................................................................. 124
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
6.1
Inspection item ....................................................................................................... 125
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
7
Daily inspection ..................................................................................................................... 125
Periodic inspection ................................................................................................................ 125
Daily and periodic inspection ................................................................................................. 126
Display of the life of the inverter parts ................................................................................... 127
Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 129
Replacement of parts ............................................................................................................ 129
Inverter replacement.............................................................................................................. 133
SPECIFICATIONS
7.1
7.2
7.3
134
Rating ..................................................................................................................... 134
Common specifications .......................................................................................... 136
Outline dimension drawings ................................................................................... 138
7.3.1
7.4
125
Inverter outline dimension drawings ...................................................................................... 138
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure ............................................................ 149
7.4.1
7.4.2
When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) ................................................... 149
Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-F740-185K or more............................................................ 149
APPENDICES
151
Appendix 1 For customers who are replacing the conventional model
with this inverter ..................................................................................... 151
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-F500 series ......................................................................... 151
Appendix 1-2 Replacement of the FR-A100 <EXCELENT> series ................................................. 152
Appendix 2
Appendix 3
Instructions for UL and cUL compliance ............................................... 153
Instructions for compliance with the EU Directives ............................... 155
III
CONTENTS
5.6.6
5.6.7
5.6.8
5.6.9
5.6.10
5.6.11
5.6.12
5.6.13
5.6.14
<Abbreviations>
DU: Operation panel (FR-DU07)
PU: Operation panel(FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
Inverter: Mitsubishi inverter FR-F700 series
FR-F700: Mitsubishi inverter FR-F700 series
Pr.: Parameter Number
PU operation: Operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
External operation: Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation: Combined operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and external operation
Standard motor: SF-JR
Constant-torque motor: SF-HRCA
<Trademarks>
LONWORKS® is registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vender Association, Inc.).
Company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.
IV
1 PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to
ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.
• Inverter Model
FR - F740 - 5.5 K
Symbol Voltage Class
F720 Three-phase 200V class
F740 Three-phase 400V class
Indicate inverter
capacity (kW)
Cooling fan
(Refer to page 130)
PU connector
(Refer to page 26)
RS-485 terminals
(Refer to page 27)
Connector for plug-in option connection
(Refer to the instruction manual of options.)
Voltage/current input switch
(Refer to page 8)
AU/PTC switchover switch
(Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
(Refer to page 9)
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
(Refer to page 5)
1
Alarm lamp
Lit when the inverter is
in the alarm status
(fault).
Control circuit
terminal block
(Refer to page 10)
Main circuit terminal block
(Refer to page 19)
Front cover
(Refer to page 5)
PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION
Power lamp
Lit when the control circuit
(R1/L11, S1/L21) is supplied
with power.
Charge lamp
Lit when power is
supplied to the main
circuit (Refer to page 10)
Rating plate
Capacity plate
Capacity plate
Combed shaped
wiring cover
(Refer to page 13)
FR-F740-5.5K
200V
FR-F740-5.5K
· DC reactor supplied (75K or more)
· Eyebolt for hanging the inverter (37K to 315K)
· Fan cover fixing screws (30K or less)
(Refer to page 155)
400V
Inverter model
Applied motor
capacity
Input rating
Output rating
Serial number
Inverter model Serial number
• Accessory
Rating plate
Capacity
Screw Size (mm)
Number
2.2K to 5.5K
7.5K to 15K
18.5K to 30K
3.7K, 5.5K
7.5K to 18.5K
22K, 30K
M3 × 35
M4 × 40
M4 × 50
M3 × 35
M4 × 40
M4 × 50
1
2
1
1
2
1
Capacity
Eyebolt Size
Number
37K
45K to 160K
185K to 315K
M8
M10
M12
2
2
2
Harmonic suppression guideline
All models of General-purpose inverters used by specific consumers are covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers
who receive high voltage or special high voltage". (
For further details, refer to the chapter 3 of the instruction manual (applied) .)
1
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Three-phase AC power supply
Use within the permissible power supply
specifications of the inverter.
Inverter
(FR-F700)
Programmable controller
(Refer to page 134)
Moulded case circuit
breaker (MCCB)
or earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELB), fuse
RS-485 terminal block
The inverter can be
connected with computers
such as programmable
controller.
It supports Mitsubishi inverter
protocol and Modbus-RTU
(binary) protocol.
The breaker must be selected carefully since
an in-rush current flows in the inverter at
power on.
(Refer to page 3)
The life of the inverter is influenced by surrounding
air temperature. The surrounding air temperature
should be as low as possible within the permissible
range. Especially when mounting the inverter
inside an enclosure, take cautions of the
surrounding air temperature. (Refer to page 7)
Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the inverter.
The control signal lines must be kept fully away
from the main circuit to protect them from
noise.(Refer to page 8)
Refer to page 9 for the built-in EMC filter.
Magnetic contactor(MC)
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure safety.
Do not use this magnetic contactor to start and
stop the inverter.
Doing so will cause the inverter life to be shorten.
(Refer to page 3)
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL)
Reactors (option) should be used when power
harmonics measures are taken, the power factor is
to be improved or the inverter is installed near a
large power supply system (1000kVA or more). The
inverter may be damaged if you do not use reactors.
Select the reactor according to the model.
For the 55K or less, remove the jumpers across
terminals P/+-P1 to connect to the DC reactor.
(Refer to the chapter 2 of the Instruction
Manual (applied) .)
AC reactor
(FR-HAL)
EMC filter
(ferrite core)
(FR-BLF)
EMC filter
(ferrite core)
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
DC reactor
(FR-HEL)
P/+ P1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P/+ N/-
For the 75K or more, a DC
reactor is supplied.
Always install the reactor.
Earth
(Ground)
U V W
The 55K or less
has a built-in common
mode choke.
Install an EMC filter (ferrite
core) to reduce the
electromagnetic noise
generated from the inverter.
Effective in the range from
about 1MHz to 10MHz.
A wire should be wound four
turns at a maximum.
Motor
Brake unit
(FR-BU2, FR-BU*1, MT-BU5*2)
Earth
(Ground)
P/+ PR
P/+
High power factor
converter
(FR-HC*1, MT-HC*2)
Power regeneration
common converter
(FR-CV*1)
Power regeneration
converter (MT-RC*2)
Power supply harmonics
can be greatly suppressed.
Install this as required.
Greater braking capability
is obtained.
Install this as required.
PR
Resistor unit
(FR-BR*1, MT-BR5*2)
The regeneration braking
capability of the inverter can be
exhibited fully.
Install this as required.
Devices connected to the output
Do not install a power factor correction capacitor,
surge suppressor or EMC filter (capacitor) on the
output side of the inverter.
When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on the
output side of the inverter, contact each manufacturer
for selection of the moulded case circuit breaker.
Earth (Ground)
To prevent an electric shock, always earth
(ground) the motor and inverter.
*1 Compatible with the 55K or less.
*2 Compatible with the 75K or more.
CAUTION
· Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side. This will
cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected,
immediately remove them.
· Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication
devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference.
(Refer to the chapter 2 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
· Refer to the instruction manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.
2
Peripheral devices
2.1 Peripheral devices
Check the inverter model of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according
to the capacity. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
200V class
Applicable Inverter Model
*1
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
*1
*2
*3
FR-F720-0.75K
FR-F720-1.5K
FR-F720-2.2K
FR-F720-3.7K
FR-F720-5.5K
FR-F720-7.5K
FR-F720-11K
FR-F720-15K
FR-F720-18.5K
FR-F720-22K
FR-F720-30K
FR-F720-37K
FR-F720-45K
FR-F720-55K
FR-F720-75K
FR-F720-90K
FR-F720-110K
Breaker Selection*2
Without reactor
connection
30AF 10A
30AF 15A
30AF 20A
30AF 30A
50AF 50A
100AF 60A
100AF 75A
225AF 125A
225AF 150A
225AF 175A
225AF 225A
400AF 250A
400AF 300A
400AF 400A
⎯
⎯
⎯
Input Side Magnetic
Contactor*3
With reactor
connection
Without reactor
connection
30AF 10A
30AF 15A
30AF 15A
30AF 30A
50AF 40A
50AF 50A
100AF 75A
100AF 100A
225AF 125A
225AF 150A
225AF 175A
225AF 225A
400AF 300A
400AF 350A
400AF 400A
400AF 400A
600AF 500A
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N25
S-N35
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N95
S-N150
S-N180
S-N220
⎯
⎯
⎯
With reactor
connection
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N35
S-N50
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N125
S-N150
S-N180
S-N300
S-N300
S-N400
Selections for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with power supply voltage of 200VAC 50Hz.
Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
MCCB
INV
IM
Install one MCCB per inverter.
For using commercial-power supply operation, select a breaker with capacity which allows the motor to be
MCCB
INV
IM
directly power supplied.
For the use in the United States or Canada, provide the appropriate UL and cUL listed Class RK5 or Class
L type fuse or UL 489 molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) that is suitable for branch circuit protection.
(Refer to page 153.)
Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the
MC with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
CAUTION
⋅ When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model and cable and reactor according to the motor output.
⋅ When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
3
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Motor
Output (kW)
Peripheral devices
400V class
Motor
Output
(kW)
Applicable Inverter Model
*1
*1
*2
*3
Breaker Selection*2
Without reactor
connection
30AF 5A
30AF 10A
30AF 10A
30AF 20A
30AF 30A
30AF 30A
50AF 50A
100AF 60A
100AF 75A
100AF 100A
225AF 125A
225AF 150A
225AF 175A
225AF 200A
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
With reactor
connection
30AF 5A
30AF 10A
30AF 10A
30AF 15A
30AF 20A
30AF 30A
50AF 40A
50AF 50A
100AF 60A
100AF 75A
100AF 100A
225AF 125A
225AF 150A
225AF 175A
225AF 225A
225AF 225A
225AF 225A
400AF 400A
400AF 400A
400AF 400A
400AF 400A
600AF 500A
600AF 600A
600AF 600A
800AF 700A
800AF 800A
1000AF 900A
Input Side Magnetic
Contactor*3
Without reactor
connection
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N25
S-N35
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N80
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
With reactor
connection
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
150
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
FR-F740-0.75K
FR-F740-1.5K
FR-F740-2.2K
FR-F740-3.7K
FR-F740-5.5K
FR-F740-7.5K
FR-F740-11K
FR-F740-15K
FR-F740-18.5K
FR-F740-22K
FR-F740-30K
FR-F740-37K
FR-F740-45K
FR-F740-55K
FR-F740-75K
FR-F740-90K
FR-F740-110K
FR-F740-132K
FR-F740-160K
FR-F740-160K
FR-F740-185K
FR-F740-220K
FR-F740-250K
FR-F740-280K
FR-F740-315K
FR-F740-355K
FR-F740-400K
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N11, S-N12
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N25
S-N50
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N95
S-N150
S-N180
S-N220
S-N300
S-N300
S-N300
S-N400
S-N600
S-N600
S-N600
S-N600
S-N800
450
FR-F740-450K
⎯
1000AF 1000A
⎯
1000A
Rated product
500
FR-F740-500K
⎯
1200AF 1200A
⎯
1000A
Rated product
560
FR-F740-560K
⎯
1600AF 1500A
⎯
1200A
Rated product
Selections for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with power supply voltage of 400VAC 50Hz.
Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
MCCB
INV
IM
Install one MCCB per inverter.
For using commercial-power supply operation, select a breaker with capacity which allows the motor to be
MCCB
INV
IM
directly power supplied.
For the use in the United States or Canada, provide the appropriate UL and cUL listed Class RK5 or Class
L type fuse or UL 489 molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) that is suitable for branch circuit protection.
(Refer to page 153.)
Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the
MC with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
CAUTION
⋅ When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model and cable and reactor according to the motor output.
⋅ When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
4
Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover
•Removal of the operation panel
1) Loosen the two screws on the operation panel.
(These screws cannot be removed.)
2) Push the left and right hooks of the operation panel
and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.
When reinstalling the operation panel, insert it straight to reinstall securely and tighten the fixed screws of the
operation panel.
FR-F720-30K or less, FR-F740-30K or less
•Removal
1) Loosen the installation screws of the
front cover.
2) Pull the front cover toward you to remove by pushing an
installation hook using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover
Front cover
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Installation hook
•Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of
the front cover into the sockets of the
inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports,
securely press the front cover
against the inverter.
(Although installation can be done
with the operation panel mounted,
make sure that a connector is
securely fixed.)
Front cover
3) Tighten the installation
screws and fix the front
cover.
Front cover
Front cover
5
Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
FR-F720-37K or more, FR-F740-37K or more
•Removal
1) Remove installation screws on
the front cover 1 to remove the
front cover 1.
2) Loosen the installation
screws of the front cover 2.
3) Pull the front cover 2 toward you to
remove by pushing an installation
hook on the right side using left
fixed hooks as supports.
Installation hook
Front cover 1
Front cover 2
•Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the
front cover 2 into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely
press the front cover 2 against the inverter.
(Although installation can be done with the
operation panel mounted, make sure that a
connector is securely fixed.)
Front cover 2
3) Fix the front cover 2 with the
installation screws.
Front cover 2
4) Fix the front cover 1 with the
installation screws.
Front cover 1
Front cover 2
REMARKS
⋅ For the FR-F740-185K or more, the front cover 1 is separated into two parts.
CAUTION
1.
2.
6
Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.
The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the
front cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed.
Installation of the inverter and instructions
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions
• Installation of the Inverter
Installation on the enclosure
30K or less
CAUTION
37K or more
⋅ When encasing multiple inverters, install them in
parallel as a cooling measure.
⋅ Install the inverter vertically.
Vertical
Refer to the cleara
nces below.
Fix six positions for the FR-F740185K to 400K and fix eight positions
for the FR-F740-450K to 560K.
• Install the inverter under the following conditions.
Clearances (front)
Surrounding air temperature and humidity
Measurement
position
5cm Inverter 5cm
Measurement
position
55K or less
20cm or more
10cm or more
5cm
or more *
5cm
Temperature: -10°C to 50°C
Humidity: 90% RH maximum
Leave enough clearances as a
cooling measure.
5cm
or more *
Clearances (side)
75K or more
10cm
or more
10cm or more
10cm
or more
5cm Inverter
or more
*
20cm or more
*1cm or more for 3.7K or less
*1cm or more for 3.7K or less
REMARKS
• For replacing the cooling fan of the FR-F740-185K or more, 30cm of space is necessary in front of the inverter.
2
• The inverter consists of precision mechanical and electronic parts. Never install or handle it in any of the following
conditions as doing so could cause an operation fault or failure.
Direct sunlight
Vertical mounting
(When installing two or
more inverters, install
them in parallel.)
Vibration(5.9m/s2 or more at 10 to
55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes))*
* 2.9m/s2 or more for the 185K or
more
Transportation by
holding the front cover
High temperature,
high humidity
Oil mist, flammable
gas, corrosive gas,
fluff, dust, etc.
Horizontal placement
Mounting to
combustible material
7
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Refer to page 130 for fan replacement.
Wiring
2.4 Wiring
2.4.1
Terminal connection diagram
*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Be sure to connect the DC reactor
supplied with the 75K or more.
When a DC reactor is connected
to the 55K or less, remove the
jumper across P1-P/+.
Sink logic
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Earth
(ground)
Jumper
P1
MC
MCCB
Jumper
*2. To supply power to the
control circuit separately,
remove the jumper across
R1/L11 and S1/L21.
*2
PX*7 N/- CN8*6
U
V
W
ON EMC filter
ON/OFF
OFF connector *8
R1/L11
S1/L21
PR*7
Main circuit
Earth
(Ground)
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Forward
Terminal functions vary
rotation
with the input terminal
start
assignment
Reverse
(Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)
rotation
(Refer to the chapter 4 of the
start
Instruction Manual (applied))
Jumper
P/+
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Three-phase AC
power supply
Resistor unit
(Option)
Brake unit
(Option)
*1
Control circuit
B1
STR
A1
RUN
RT
SU
MRS
IPF
Output stop
RES *3
Reset
OL
AU
24VDC power supply
(Common for external power supply transistor)
PC
CS PTC
SD
Frequency setting signal (Analog)
3
2
1
Auxiliary (+)
input (-)
Terminal
4 input (+)
(-)
(Current
input)
Connector
Open collector output
Running
Terminal functions
vary with the output
Up to frequency terminal assignment
(Pr. 190 to Pr. 194)
Instantaneous (Refer to the chapter 4
power failure
of the Instruction
Manual (applied))
Overload
FU
Frequency detection
SINK
AU
*5. It is recommended to use
2W1kΩ when the
frequency setting signal is
changed frequently.
Relay output 2
JOG
Terminal 4 input selection
(Current input selection)
Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure
Contact input common
(Refer to the chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (applied) )
(Refer to the chapter 4
of the Instruction
Manual (applied) )
RL
Second function selection
*4. Terminal input specifications
can be changed by analog
input specifications switchover
(Pr. 73, Pr. 267). Set the
voltage/current input switch in
the OFF position to select
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to
10V) and ON to select current
input (0 to 20mA).
Relay output
Terminal functions
vary with the output
Relay output 1 terminal assignment
(Fault output) (Pr. 195, Pr. 196)
A2
Jog mode
Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ
*5
Earth
(ground)
cable
*8. The 200V class 0.75K and 1.5K
are not provided with the ON/OFF
connector EMC filter.
B2
RM
Low speed
*3. AU terminal can be
used as PTC input
terminal.
IM
C2
RH
Middle speed
Motor
STOP
SOURCE
Multi-speed
selection
*7. Do not use PR and PX terminals.
Please do not remove the jumper
connected to terminal PR and PX.
C1
STF
Start self-holding selection
High speed
*6. A CN8 (for MT-BU5)
connector is provided
with the 75K or more.
SE
PU
*4 Voltage/current connector
input switch
4 2
10E(+10V)
ON
FM
10(+5V)
OFF
0 to 5VDC Initial value
SD
2 0 to 10VDC
selected *4
0 to 20mADC
5
AM
(Analog common)
Initial
0 to ±10VDC value
1
*4
selected
0 to ±5VDC
Initial
4 to 20mADC value
4 0 to 5VDC
selected *4
0 to 10VDC
5
TXD-
+
Indicator
- (Frequency meter, etc.)
Calibration
resistor *9
Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale
(+)
(-)
Analog signal output
(0 to 10VDC)
RS-485 terminals
Data transmission
RXD+
SG
Option connector 1
*9. It is not necessary
when calibrating the
indicator from the
operation panel.
TXD+
RXD-
for plug-in option
connection
Open collector output common
Sink/source common
Terminating
resistor VCC
Data reception
GND
5V (Permissible load
current 100mA)
CAUTION
· To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm away from the power cables. Also separate the
main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
· After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
· Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Operation with a wrong setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
8
Wiring
2.4.2
EMC filter
This inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter (capacitive filter) and common mode choke.
The EMC filter is effective for reduction of air-propagated noise on the input side of the inverter.
The EMC filter is factory-set to disable (OFF). To enable it, fit the EMC filter ON/OFF connector to the ON position.
The input side common mode choke, built-in the 55K or less inverter, is always valid regardless of ON/OFF of the EMC
filter ON/OFF connector.
0.75K to 5.5K
EMC filter OFF
(initial setting)
FR-F720-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740-0.75K to 5.5K
15K or more
7.5K, 11K
EMC filter ON
EMC filter OFF
(initial setting)
FR-F720-7.5K, 11K
FR-F740-7.5K, 11K
EMC filter ON
FR-F720-15K
FR-F740-15K, 18.5K
FR-F720-18.5K to 30K
FR-F740-22K, 30K
EMC filter OFF
(initial setting)
EMC filter ON
FR-F720-37K or more
FR-F740-37K or more
EMC filter
ON/OFF
connector
V
W
The FR-F720-0.75K and 1.5K are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (Always ON)
<How to disconnect the connector>
(1) Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is off, wait for
at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage
using a tester or the like. (For the front cover removal method, refer to page 5.)
(2) When disconnecting the connector, push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or
forcibly pulling the connector with the tab fixed. When installing the connector, also engage the fixing tab securely.
If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, use a pair of long-nose pliers, etc.
EMC filter
ON/OFF connector
(Side view)
Disengage connector fixing tab
With tab disengaged,
pull up connector straight.
CAUTION
⋅ Fit the connector to either ON or OFF.
⋅ Enabling (turning on) the EMC filter increase leakage current. (Refer to the chapter 3 of
the Instruction Manual (applied))
WARNING
While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
9
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
U
Wiring
2.4.3
Specification of main circuit terminal
Terminal
Symbol
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
R1/L11,
S1/L21
Terminal Name
AC power input
Inverter output
Power supply for
control circuit
Description
Connect to the commercial power supply.
Keep these terminals open when using the high power factor converter
(FR-HC, MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain the
fault display and fault output or when using the high power factor converter
(FR-HC, MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV),
remove the jumpers from terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21 and
apply external power to these terminals.
The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/
L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter capacity.
200V class
400V class
18.5K
80VA
60VA
22K or more
80VA
80VA
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU and MT-BU5), power
regeneration common converter (FR-CV), high power factor converter (FRHC and MT-HC) or power regeneration converter (MT-RC).
For the 55K or less, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ - P1 and
DC reactor
connect the DC reactor. (Be sure to connect the DC reactor supplied with
connection
the 75K or more.)
Please do not remove or use terminals PR and PX or the jumper connected.
Brake unit
connection
P/+, N/-
P/+, P1
PR, PX
Earth (ground)
2.4.4
15K or less
60VA
60VA
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).
Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor
wiring
200V class
FR-F720-0.75K, 1.5K
FR-F720-2.2K to 5.5K
Jumper
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Jumper
R1/L11 S1/L21 N/-
PR
P/+
IM
Power supply Motor
Jumper
N/-
Power
supply
P/+
PR
PX
IM
Charge lamp
As this is an inside cover fixing screw,
do not remove it.
10
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
PX
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size (M4)
Motor
Screw size
(M4)
Charge lamp
Wiring
FR-F720-7.5K, 11K
FR-F720-15K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size
(M4)
Charge lamp
Jumper
*
*
Jumper
N/-
*
P/+ PR
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
P/+
Screw size (M5)
Screw size
(M5)
PX
*
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
IM
IM
Power supply
Motor
Screw size (M5)
* Screw size of terminal
R1/L11, S1/L21, PR
and PX is M4.
PR
Motor
Power supply
Screw size (M5)
FR-F720-18.5K to 30K
FR-F720-37K to 55K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size
(M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp
Screw size
Jumper
(18.5K:M6, 22K/30K:M8)
Charge lamp
PR
N/-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P/+
Jumper
IM
Power supply
Jumper
Screw size(37K:M8, 45K/55K:M10)
Motor
2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
P/+
Jumper
Screw size
Power (37K:M6, 45K/55K:M8)
supply
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Screw size (M6)
IM
Motor
FR-F720-75K to 110K
R1/L11 S1/L21 Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp
Jumper
Screw size (M12)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
P/+
P/+
Screw size
(M10)
P/+
Power supply
Screw size (M12)
(for option)
IM
Motor
DC reactor
11
Wiring
400V class
FR-F740-0.75K to 5.5K
FR-F740-7.5K, 11K
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P/+
N/-
PR
Charge lamp
PX
R1/L11 S1/L21
N/-
Jumper
Screw size
(M4)
IM
Power
supply
P/+ PR
Jumper
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Screw size
(M4)
Motor
PX
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
IM
Motor
Power supply
Screw size
(M4)
FR-F740-15K, 18.5K
FR-F740-22K, 30K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size
(M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp
Jumper
Charge lamp
PR
Jumper
Screw size (M6)
Jumper
P/+
Screw size (M5)
N/-
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
IM
PR
Power supply
P/+
Jumper
Motor
IM
Power supply
Screw size (M5)
Motor
FR-F740-37K to 55K
Screw size (M6)
FR-F740-75K to 110K
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size(M4)
Charge lamp
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Charge lamp
Jumper
Screw size (37K: M6, 45K/55K: M8)
Screw size
Screw size
(75K: M8, 90K/110K: M10) Screw size (M10) (75K: M8, 90K/110K: M10)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
P/+
Jumper
P/+
P/+
IM
Screw size
Power (37K: M6, 45K/55K: M8) Motor
supply
12
N/-
Power
supply
IM
Motor
DC reactor
Screw size
(75K: M8,
90K/110K: M10)
Wiring
FR-F740-132K to 220K
FR-F740-250K to 560K
R1/L11 S1/L21 Screw size (M4)
R1/L11 S1/L21 Screw size (M4)
Charge lamp
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
Screw size
(132K/160K: M10
185K/220K: M12)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/-
P/+
Screw size (M12)
P/+
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
Screw size
(M10)
P/+
Power supply
Screw size (M12)
(for option)
IM
P/+
Motor
DC reactor
IM
Motor
Power supply
DC reactor
Screw size (M10)
CAUTION
· The power supply cables must be connected to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. (Phase sequence needs not to be matched.) Never connect
the power cable to the U, V, W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
· Connect the motor to U, V, W. At this time, turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates the motor in the
counterclockwise direction when viewed from the motor shaft.
· When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the 250K or more, tighten a nut from the right side of the conductor. When
wiring two wires, place wires on both sides of the conductor. (Refer to the drawing below.) For wiring, use bolts (nuts) provided
with the inverter.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2
• Handling of the wiring cover
(FR-F720-18.5K, 22K, FR-F740-22K, 30K)
For the hook of the wiring cover, cut off the necessary
parts using a pair of long-nose pliers etc.
CAUTION
Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If parts where
no wire is put through has been cut off (10mm or more),
protective structure (JEM1030) becomes an open type
(IP00).
13
Wiring
(1) Cable sizes etc., of the main control circuit terminals and earth (ground) terminals
Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% max.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor
torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m.
200V class (when input power supply is 220V)
Applicable Inverter
Type
FR-F720-0.75K to
2.2K
FR-F720-3.7K
FR-F720-5.5K
FR-F720-7.5K
FR-F720-11K
FR-F720-15K
FR-F720-18.5K
FR-F720-22K
FR-F720-30K
FR-F720-37K
FR-F720-45K
FR-F720-55K
FR-F720-75K
FR-F720-90K
FR-F720-110K
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
14
Terminal Tightening
Screw
Torque
Size *4
N·m
Crimping
Terminal
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
Cable Sizes
2
HIV, etc. (mm ) *1
Earth
R/L1,
S/L2,
U, V, W (Ground)
T/L3
cable
M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
2
M4
M4
M5
M5
M5
M6
M8 (M6)
M8 (M6)
M8 (M6)
M10 (M8)
M10 (M8)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.4
7.8
7.8
7.8
14.7
14.7
24.5
24.5
24.5
5.5-4
5.5-4
14-5
14-5
22-5
38-6
38-8
60-8
80-8
100-10
100-10
150-12
150-12
100-12
5.5-4
5.5-4
8-5
14-5
22-5
38-6
38-8
60-8
80-8
100-10
100-10
150-12
150-12
100-12
3.5
5.5
14
14
22
38
38
60
80
100
100
125
150
2×100
3.5
5.5
8
14
22
38
38
60
80
100
100
125
150
2×100
3.5
5.5
5.5
14
14
22
22
22
22
38
38
38
38
38
AWG/MCM *2
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
14
14
12
12
10
10
6
8
6
6
4
6 (*5)
2
2
2
2
1/0
1/0
3/0
3/0
4/0
4/0
4/0
4/0
MCM250 MCM250
2×4/0
2×4/0
2×4/0
2×4/0
PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
Earth
R/L1,
S/L2,
U, V, W (Ground)
T/L3
cable
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
6
16
16
25
35
35
50
70
95
95
⎯
⎯
⎯
4
6
10
16
25
35
35
50
70
95
95
⎯
⎯
⎯
4
6
16
16
16
25
25
25
35
50
50
⎯
⎯
⎯
The cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
75°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
The recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the
surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
For the 15K or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 18.5K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
90°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding).
A screw for earthing (grounding) of the 22K or more is indicated in ( ).
When connecting the option unit to P/+, P1, N/-, use THHN cables for the option and terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W.
Wiring
400V class (when input power supply is 440V)
cable
FR-F740-0.75K to
3.7K
FR-F740-5.5K
FR-F740-7.5K
FR-F740-11K
FR-F740-15K
FR-F740-18.5K
FR-F740-22K
FR-F740-30K
FR-F740-37K
FR-F740-45K
FR-F740-55K
FR-F740-75K
FR-F740-90K
FR-F740-110K
FR-F740-132K
FR-F740-160K
FR-F740-185K
FR-F740-220K
FR-F740-250K
FR-F740-280K
FR-F740-315K
FR-F740-355K
FR-F740-400K
FR-F740-450K
FR-F740-500K
FR-F740-560K
*1
*2
*3
*4
cable
M4
1.5
2-4
2-4
2
2
2
14
14
2.5
2.5
2.5
M4
M4
M4
M5
M5
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M10
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
M12 (M10)
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
4.4
4.4
4.4
7.8
7.8
7.8
14.7
14.7
14.7
14.7
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
2-4
5.5-4
5.5-4
8-5
14-5
14-6
22-6
22-6
38-8
60-8
60-8
60-10
80-10
100-10
150-10
150-12
100-12
100-12
150-12
150-12
200-12
C2-200
C2-250
C2-250
C2-200
2-4
5.5-4
5.5-4
8-5
8-5
14-6
22-6
22-6
38-8
60-8
60-8
60-10
80-10
100-10
150-10
150-12
100-12
100-12
150-12
150-12
200-12
C2-200
C2-250
C2-250
C2-200
2
3.5
5.5
8
14
14
22
22
38
60
60
60
80
100
125
150
2×100
2×100
2×125
2×150
2×200
2×200
2×250
2×250
3×200
2
3.5
5.5
8
8
14
22
22
38
60
60
60
80
100
125
150
2×100
2×100
2×125
2×150
2×200
2×200
2×250
2×250
3×200
3.5
3.5
8
8
14
14
14
14
22
22
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
60
60
60
100
100
12
12
10
8
6
6
4
4
1
1/0
1/0
3/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
2×4/0
2×4/0
2×250
2×300
2×350
2×400
2×500
2×500
3×350
14
12
10
8
8
6
4
4
2
1/0
1/0
3/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
2×4/0
2×4/0
2×250
2×300
2×350
2×400
2×500
2×500
3×350
2.5
4
6
10
16
16
25
25
50
50
50
50
70
95
120
150
2×95
2×95
2×120
2×150
2×185
2×185
2×240
2×240
3×185
2.5
4
6
10
10
16
25
25
50
50
50
50
70
95
120
150
2×95
2×95
2×120
2×150
2×185
2×185
2×240
2×240
3×185
4
4
10
10
16
16
16
16
25
25
25
25
35
50
70
95
95
95
120
150
2×95
2×95
2×120
2×120
2×150
For the FR-F740-55K or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable)) with continuous
maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the FR-F740-75K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated
cable)) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and wiring is performed
in an enclosure.
For the FR-F740-45K or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the FR-F740-55K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHN cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
For the FR-F740-45K or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the FR-F740-55K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in the Europe.)
The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding).
A screw for earthing (grounding) of the 185K or more is indicated in ( ).
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:
line voltage drop [V]=
3 × wire resistance[mΩ/m] × wiring distance[m] × current[A]
1000
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque
reduction) in the low speed range.
CAUTION
· Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tighten too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
A screw that has been tighten too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
· Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
15
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Applicable
Inverter Type
Crimping
Cable Sizes
(Compression)
2
Terminal Tightening
AWG/MCM *2
HIV, etc. (mm ) *1
PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
Terminal
Screw
Torque
Earth
Earth
Size *4
N·m
R/L1, S/L2,
R/L1, S/L2,
R/L1, S/L2,
R/L1, S/L2,
(Ground)
(Ground)
U,
V,
W
U,
V,
W
U,
V,
W
U,
V,
W
T/L3
T/L3
T/L3
T/L3
Wiring
(2) Notes on earthing (grounding)
• Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and motor must be earthed (grounded). This
inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety
regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
A neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400V class inverter in compliance with EN standard must be used.
• Use the dedicated earth (ground) terminal to earth (ground) the inverter.
(Do not use the screw in the casing, chassis, etc.)
• Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. Use the cable whose size is equal to or greater than that indicated in page
14, 15 and minimize the cable length. The earthing (grounding) point should be as near as possible to the inverter.
To be compliant with the EU Directive (Low Voltage Directive), earth (ground) the inverter according to
the instructions on page 155.
(3) Total wiring length
The overall wiring length for connection of a single motor or multiple motors should be within the value in the table below.
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection Setting
(carrier frequency)
0.75K
1.5K
2.2K or More
2 (2kHz) or less
3 to 15 (3kHz to 14.5kHz) *
300m
200m
500m
300m
500m
500m
* For the 75K or more, the setting range of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection is "0 to 6".
Total wiring length (1.5K or more)
500m or less
300m
300m
300m + 300m = 600m
When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
Take the following measures 1) or 2) in this case.
1) Use a "400V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set frequency in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection
according to wiring length
Wiring Length
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection Setting
(carrier frequency)
50m or less
50m to 100m
exceeding 100m
14.5kHz or less
9kHz or less
4kHz or less
2) Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) to the 55K or less and the sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC)
to the 75K or more on the inverter output side.
CAUTION
· Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by the stray capacitances of the
wiring, leading to a malfunction of the overcurrent protective function or fast response current limit function or a malfunction or fault
of the equipment connected on the inverter output side. If fast-response current limit function malfunctions, disable this function.
(For Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection, refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
· For details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection , refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied). (When using an optional sine
wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) for the 75K or more, set "25" in Pr.72 (2.5kHz)).
· For explanation of surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to the manual of each
option.
16
Wiring
(4) Cable size of the control circuit power supply (terminal R1/L11, S1/L21)
· Terminal Screw Size: M4
· Cable size: 0.75mm2 to 2mm2
· Tightening torque: 1.5N·m
(5) When connecting the control circuit and the main circuit separately to the power supply
<Connection diagram>
When fault occurs, opening of the electromagnetic contactor (MC) on the
inverter power supply side results in power loss in the control circuit,
disabling the fault output signal retention. Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 are
provided for when retention of a fault signal is required. In this case, connect
the power supply terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 of the control circuit to the
primary side of the MC.
Do not connect the power cable to incorrect terminals. Doing so may
damage the inverter.
MC
R/L1 Inverter
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
Remove the jumper
• FR-F720-0.75K to 5.5K, FR-F740-0.75K to 5.5K
1) Loosen the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Remove the jumper
4) Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control
circuit to the lower terminals
(R1/L11, S1/L21).
3)
1)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
2)
4)
R1/L11
S1/L21
R1/L11
2
S1/L21
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Main circuit terminal block
• FR-F720-7.5K, 11K, FR-F740-7.5K, 11K
1) Remove the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Remove the jumper.
4) Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control
circuit to the upper terminals
(R1/L11, S1/L21).
3)
1)
R1/L11
S1/L21
2)
R1/L11
S1/L21
4)
R/
L1
S/
L2
T/
L3
Main circuit
terminal block
17
Wiring
• FR-F720-15K, FR-F740-15K or more
1) Remove the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Pull the jumper toward you to
remove.
4) Connect the separate power supply
cable for the control circuit to the
upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
R1/ S1/
L11 L21 Power supply
terminal block
for the control circuit
R/L1S/L2 T/L3
3)
Power supply terminal block
for the control circuit
R1/L11
S1/L21
MC
1)
2)
4)
Main power supply
FR-F720-15K
FR-F740-15K, 18.5K
FR-F720-18.5K to 30K
FR-F740-22K, 30K
FR-F720-37K or more
FR-F740-37K or more
Power supply
terminal block for
the control circuit
U
V
W
CAUTION
· Be sure to use the inverter with the jumpers across terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21 removed when supplying power
from other sources. The inverter may be damaged if you do not remove the jumper.
· The voltage should be the same as that of the main control circuit when the control circuit power is supplied from other than the
primary side of the MC.
· The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter
capacity.
200V class
400V class
15K or less
60VA
60VA
18.5K
80VA
60VA
22K or more
80VA
80VA
· If the main circuit power is switched off (for 0.1s or more) then on again, the inverter resets and a fault output will not be held.
18
Wiring
2.4.5
Control circuit terminals
indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 196 (I/O terminal function selection) (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Terminal
Symbol
STF
STR
STOP
RH,
RM, RL
JOG
Contact input
RT
Terminal
Name
Forward
rotation start
Reverse
rotation start
Start selfholding
selection
Multi-speed
selection
Jog mode
selection
Second
function
selection
MRS
Output stop
RES
Reset
Terminal 4
input selection
AU
PTC input
CS
SD
PC
Selection of
automatic
restart after
instantaneous
power failure
Contact input
common (sink)
(initial setting)
External
transistor
common
(source)
24VDC power
supply common
External
transistor
common (sink)
(initial setting)
Contact input
common
(source)
24VDC power
supply
Rated
Specifications
Description
Turn on the STF signal to start forward
rotation and turn it off to stop.
Turn on the STR signal to start reverse
rotation and turn it off to stop.
When the STF and
STR signals are turned
on simultaneously, the
stop command is given.
57
Turn on the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal.
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH,
RM and RL signals.
Turn on the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting) and
turn on the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog operation.
Turn on the RT signal to select second function.
When the second function such as "second torque boost" and
"second V/F (base frequency)" are set, turning on the RT signal
selects these functions.
Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter
output.
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by
electromagnetic brake.
Used to reset fault output provided when fault occurs.
Turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it off.
Initial setting is for reset always. By setting Pr.75, reset can be set
to enabled only at fault occurrence. Inverter recovers about 1s
after the reset is released.
Terminal 4 is valid only when the AU signal is turned on. (The
frequency setting signal can be set between 0 and 20mADC.)
Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 (voltage input) invalid.
AU terminal is used as PTC input terminal (thermal protection of
the motor). When using it as PTC input terminal, set the AU/PTC
switch to PTC.
When the CS signal is left on, the inverter restarts automatically at
power restoration. Note that restart setting is necessary for this
operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled.
Refer to
*2
59
*2
*2
Input resistance
4.7kΩ
Voltage at
opening: 21 to
27VDC
Contacts at
short-circuited: 4
to 6mADC
*2
102
63
2
*2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Type
(1) Input signals
*2
(Refer to
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time in the chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (applied).)
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal
FM.
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such
as a programmable controller, when source logic is selected, connect
the external power supply common for transistor output to this
terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal).
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such
as a programmable controller, when sink logic is selected, connect
the external power supply common for transistor output to this
terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
--------------------
—
Power supply
voltage range
19.2 to 28.8VDC
Permissible load
current 100mA
23
Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
19
Type
Wiring
Terminal
Symbol
10E
10
Frequency setting
2
4
Terminal
Name
Frequency
setting power
supply
Description
When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer at an initial
status, connect it to terminal 10.
Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when connecting it
to terminal 10E. (Refer to Pr. 73 Analog input selection in the chapter
4 of
Frequency
setting
(voltage)
Frequency
setting
(current)
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) provides the
maximum output frequency at 5V (10V, 20mA) and makes input
and output proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch from among input 0
to 5VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10VDC, and 0 to 20mA.
Set the voltage/current input switch in the ON position to select
current input (0 to 20mA).*1
Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the
maximum output frequency at 20mA (5V, 10V) makes input and
output proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU
signal is on (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr. 267 to switch from
among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to
10VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch in the OFF position
to select voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).*1
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Rated
Specifications
10VDC
Permissible load
current 10mA
5VDC
Permissible load
current 10mA
Voltage input:
Input resistance
10kΩ ± 1kΩ
Maximum
permissible
voltage 20VDC
Current input:
Input resistance
245Ω ± 5Ω
Maximum
permissible
current 30mA
Refer to
*2
53, 61
53, 61
Voltage/current
input switch
2
4
55, 63
Switch 1
Switch 2
1
Frequency
setting
auxiliary
Inputting 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10VDC adds this signal to terminal
2 or 4 frequency setting signal. Use Pr.73 to switch between the
input 0 to ±5VDC and 0 to ±10VDC (initial setting).
Input resistance
10kΩ ± 1kΩ
Maximum
permissible voltage
± 20VDC
*2
5
Frequency
setting
common
Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4)
and analog output terminal AM. Do not earth (ground).
--------------------
------
*1
Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Applying a voltage signal with voltage/current input switch on (current input is selected) or a current signal with switch off (voltage input is
selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of signal output devices.
*2
Refer to the chapter 4 of
20
the Instruction Manual (applied).
Wiring
Terminal
Name
Rated
Specifications
Description
A1,
B1,
C1
Relay output 1
(Fault output)
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter
protective function has activated and the output stopped.
Fault: No conduction across B-C (Across A-C Continuity),
Normal: Across B-C Continuity (No conduction across A-C)
A2,
B2,
C2
Relay output 2
1 changeover contact output
RUN
Inverter
running
SU
Up to
frequency
OL
Overload
warning
IPF
Instantaneous
power failure
FU
Frequency
detection
SE
Open collector
output common
FM
For meter
AM
Analog signal
output
* Refer to the chapter 4 of
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or
higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz). Switched
high during stop or DC injection brake operation.
Switched low when the output
frequency reaches within the range of
±10% (initial value) of the set frequency.
Switched high during acceleration/
deceleration and at a stop.
Switched low when stall prevention is
activated by the stall prevention
function. Switched high when stall
Alarm code (4bit)
prevention is cancelled.
output
Switched low when an instantaneous
power failure and under voltage
protections are activated.
Switched low when the inverter output
frequency is equal to or higher than the
preset detected frequency and high
when less than the preset detected
frequency.
Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU
Select one e.g. output frequency from
monitor items. (Not output during
inverter reset.)
The output signal is proportional to the
magnitude of the corresponding
monitoring item.
Output item:
Output frequency
(initial setting)
Output item:
Output frequency
(initial setting)
Contact capacity:
230VAC 0.3A
(Power
factor=0.4)
30VDC 0.3A
Refer to
*
*
*
Permissible load
24VDC (27VDC
maximum) 0.1A
(A voltage drop is
3.4V maximum
when the signal is
on.)
Low is when the
open collector
output transistor
is on (conducts).
High is when the
transistor is off
(does not
conduct).
-------------------Permissible load
current 2mA
1440 pulses/s at
60Hz
Output signal 0 to
10VDC
Permissible load
current 1mA
(load impedance
10kΩ or more)
Resolution 8 bit
*
*
*
*
-----
*
2
*
the Instruction Manual (applied).
Type
(3) Communication
Terminal
Symbol
RS-485 terminals
RS-485
—
Terminal
Name
PU
connector
RXD-
Inverter
transmission
terminal
Inverter
reception
terminal
SG
Earth (Ground)
TXD+
TXDRXD+
Description
Refer to
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485.
(for connection on a 1:1 basis only)
Conforming standard
: EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission format
: Multidrop link
Communication speed : 4800 to 38400bps
Overall length
: 500m
26
With the RS-485 terminals, communication can be made through RS-485.
Conforming standard
: EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission format
: Multidrop link
Communication speed : 300 to 38400bps
Overall length
: 500m
27
21
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Terminal
Symbol
Pulse
Open collector
Relay
Type
(2) Output signals
Wiring
2.4.6
Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to sink logic (SINK) when shipped from the factory.
To change the control logic, the jumper connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the
other position.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.)
1) Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be
removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2) Change the jumper connector set to the sink logic (SINK) on the rear panel of the control circuit terminal block to
source logic (SOURCE).
Jumper connector
3) Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly.
2. While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block.
22
Wiring
4) Sink logic and source logic
⋅ In sink logic, a signal switches on when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
⋅ In source logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when source logic is selected
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected
Source logic
Sink logic
PC
Current
STF
STR
Sink
connector
R
Current
STF
R
STR
Source
connector
R
R
SD
Inverter
DC input (sink type)
<Example: QX40>
RUN
TB1
Inverter
DC input (source type)
<Example: QX80>
TB1
RUN
R
R
R
SE
-
R
+ TB17
SE
- TB18
+
24VDC
24VDC
Current flow
Current flow
• When using an external power supply for transistor output
Inverter
QY40P type transistor
output unit
TB1 STF
QY80 type transistor
output unit
PC
24VDC
(SD)
TB17
PC
TB18
24VDC SD
Current flow
Constant
voltage
circuit
Fuse
TB1
STF
TB2
STR
TB17
TB18
24VDC
TB2 STR
Constant
voltage
circuit
Inverter
24VDC
(SD)
SD
Current flow
23
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
⋅ Source logic type
⋅ Sink logic type
Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform
Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal PC of
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal SD of
the inverter with terminal +24V of the external power
the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power
supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC
supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC
power supply, do not install an external power supply in
power supply, do not install a power supply in parallel in
parallel with the inverter. Doing so may cause a
the outside of the inverter. Doing so may cause a
malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents.)
malfunction due to undesirable current.)
Wiring
2.4.7
Wiring of control circuit
(1) Control circuit terminal layout
Control circuit terminal
A1
B1
C1
RL RM RH
SE
RUN
A2
RT
B2
C2 10E
10
2
AU STOP MRS RES SD
SU IPF OL
FU
SD
SD
5
FM
4
AM
STF STR JOG CS
Terminal screw size: M3.5
Tightening torque: 1.2N.m
1
PC
(2) Common terminals of the control circuit (SD 5, SE)
Terminals SD, 5, and SE are all common terminals (0V) for I/O signals and are isolated from each other. Do not
earth(ground) these terminals.
Avoid connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.
Terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, STOP, RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES,
AU, CS) and frequency output signal (FM).
The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
Terminal 5 is a common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM.
It should be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable.
Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal (RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU).
The contact input circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
(3) Signal inputs by contactless switches
The contacted input terminals of the inverter (STF, STR, STOP,
RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, CS) can be controlled
using a transistor instead of a contacted switch as shown on the
right.
External signal input using transistor
+24V
STF, etc
Inverter
SD
24
Wiring
(4) Wiring instructions
1)
2)
3)
It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or
the cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel contact fault.
The maximum wiring length should be 30m (200m for terminal FM).
Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to
prevent a contact faults when using contact inputs since the
control circuit input signals are micro-currents.
Micro signal contacts
4)
5)
6)
Twin contacts
Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and
power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit.
Always apply a voltage to the fault output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc.
z Wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or more
For wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or more, separate away from wiring of the main circuit.
Make cuts in rubber bush of the inverter side and lead wires.
<Wiring>
Rubber bush
(view from the inside)
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Make cuts along the lines inside with
a cutter knife and such.
25
Wiring
2.4.8
When connecting the operation panel using a connection cable
Having an operation panel on the enclosure surface is convenient. With a connection cable, you can mount the
operation panel (FR-DU07) to the enclosure surface, and connect it to the inverter.
Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2)(option)
Operation panel(FR-DU07)
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP)(option)
CAUTION
Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN port, FAX modem socket or telephone connector.
The inverter and machine could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
REMARKS
⋅ Refer to page 5 for removal method of the operation panel.
⋅ When using a commercially available connector and cable as a parameter unit connection cable, refer to the chapter 2 of
Instruction Manual (applied).
⋅ The inverter can be connected to the computer and FR-PU04/FR-PU07.
26
the
Wiring
2.4.9
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
RS-485 terminal block
Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485)
Transmission format: Multidrop link
Communication speed: MAX 38400bps
Overall length: 500m
Connection cable:Twisted pair cable
(4 pairs)
OPEN
100Ω
Terminating resistor switch
Factory-set to "OPEN".
Set only the terminating resistor switch of
the remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.
RDA1 RDB1 RDA2 RDB2
(RXD1+)(RXD1-)(RXD2+)(RXD2-)
TXD
RXD
SDA1 SDB1 SDA2 SDB2
(TXD1+)(TXD1-) (TXD2+) (TXD2-)
P5S SG
P5S
SG
(VCC) (GND) (VCC) (GND)
VCC
2.4.10 Communication operation
For further details, refer to the chapter 4 of
Instruction Manual (applied).
Programmable controller
Multidrop link
Inverter
Inverter
2
Inverter
(32 inverters
maximum are
connectable)
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Using the PU connector or RS-485 terminal, you can
perform communication operation from a personal
computer etc. When the PU connector is connected
with a personal, FA or other computer by a
communication cable, a user program can run and
monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
For the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link
operation), communication can be performed with the
PU connector and RS-485 terminal.
For the Modbus RTU protocol, communication can be
performed with the RS-485 terminal.
the
27
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5 Connection of stand-alone option units
The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.
Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in
accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.
2.5.1
Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2)
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2) as shown below to improve the braking capability at deceleration.
(1) Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor
ON
T
OFF OCR contact
*2
MC
MCCB
MC
MC
Three-phase AC
power supply
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
Motor
GRZG type
OCR discharging resistor *5
R
R
External thermal
relay *4
IM
*3
Inverter
P/+
N/-
*1
*3
FR-BU2
PR
A
B
P/+
C
N/BUE
SD
5m or less
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
Keep a wiring distance of within 5m between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor. Even when the wiring
is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m.
It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of discharging resistors.
Refer to FR-BU2 manual for connection method of discharging resistor.
<Recommended external thermal relay>
Brake Unit
Discharging Resistor
Recommended External Thermal Relay
FR-BU2-1.5K
GZG 300W-50Ω (one)
TH-N20CXHZ 1.3A
FR-BU2-3.7K
GRZG 200-10Ω (three in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A
FR-BU2-7.5K
GRZG 300-5Ω (four in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A
FR-BU2-15K
GRZG 400-2Ω (six in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 11A
GRZG 200-10Ω (six in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A
FR-BU2-H15K
GRZG 300-5Ω (eight in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A
FR-BU2-H30K
GRZG 400-2Ω (twelve in series)
TH-N20CXHZ 11A
FR-BU2-H7.5K
CAUTION
⋅ Set "1" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use GRZG type discharging resistor.
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
28
1/L1
5/L3
TH-N20
2/T1
To the brake
unit terminal P/+
6/T3
To a resistor
Connection of stand-alone option units
(2) FR-BR-(H) connection example with resistor unit
ON
T
OFF
*2
MC
MC
MCCB
FR-BR
MC
Motor
U
V
W
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Three phase AC
power supply
P TH1 *4
PR
TH2
IM
*3
Inverter
P/+
N/-
*1
*3
FR-BU2
PR
A
P/+
B
N/C
BUE
SD
5m or less
*1
*2
*3
*4
Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m. Even when the
wiring is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m.
Normal: across TH1-TH2...close, Alarm: across TH1-TH2...open
CAUTION
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
(3) Connection example with MT-BR5 type resistor unit
MCCB
Three phase AC
power supply
ON
MC
R/L1 U
S/L2 V
T/L3 W
P/+
N/-
Inverter
*5
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*2
Motor
IM
*1
*3
OFF CR1
2
MC
MC
5m *3
or less
P
N
BUE
SD
P
PR
Brake unit
FR-BU2
P
PR
CR1
TH1
TH2
*4
Resistor unit
MT-BR5
Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (MT-BR5) should be within 5m. If twisted wires
are used, the distance should be within 10m.
Normal: across TH1-TH2...open, Alarm: across TH1-TH2...close
CN8 connector used with the MT-BU5 type brake unit is not used.
CAUTION
⋅ Set "2" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use MT-BR5 type resistor unit.
29
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
T
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.2
Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5)
When connecting the brake unit (FR-BU(H)/MT-BU5) to improve the brake capability at deceleration, make connection
as shown below.
(1) Connection with the FR-BU (55K or less)
ON
OFF
T *2
MC
FR-BR
MC
MCCB
Three-phase AC
power supply
MC
R/L1
U
Motor
S/L2
V
IM
T/L3
W
P
PR
TH2
Inverter
FR-BU
PR
P/+
N/−
TH1
*1
HA
P/+
HB
N/−
HC
*3
5m or less
*1
*2
*3
Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU (H)) terminals so that their terminal signals match
with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m. If
twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10m.
CAUTION
⋅ If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a
magnetic contactor on the inverter’s input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault.
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
30
Connection of stand-alone option units
(2) Connection with the MT-BU5 (75K or more)
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "1" in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (applied).)
T *1
ON
MC
MCCB
U
Motor
S/L2
V
IM
T/L3
W
R/L1
Three-phase
AC power
supply
OFF
CR1
CR2
MC
MC
5m or *2
less
Inverter
P/+
N/
P
PR
CR1
TH1
P
PR
TH2
CR2
CN8
P
PR
TH1
P
PR
TH2
*1
*2
Resistor unit
Brake unit
MT-BR5
MT-BU5
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
The wiring length between the resistor unit and brake resistor should be 10m maximum when wires are
twisted and 5m maximum when wires are not twisted.
CAUTION
⋅ Install the brake unit in a place where a cooling air reaches the brake unit heatsink and within a distance of the cable supplied
with the brake unit reaches the inverter.
⋅ For wiring of the brake unit and inverter, use an accessory cable supplied with the brake unit. Connect the main circuit cable to
the inverter terminals P/+ and N/- and connect the control circuit cable to the CN8 connector inside by making cuts in the
rubber bush at the top of the inverter for leading the cable.
⋅ The brake unit which uses multiple resistor units has terminals equal to the number of resistor units. Connect one resistor unit
to one pair of terminal (P, PR).
<Inserting the CN8 connector>
Make cuts in rubber bush of the upper portion of the inverter and lead a cable.
1) Make cuts in the rubber bush for leading the CN8 connector cable with a nipper or cutter knife.
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
Rubber bushes
Make cuts in
rubber bush
2) Insert a connector on the MT-BU5 side through a rubber bush to connect to a connector on the inverter side.
CN8 connector
Wire clamp
Insert the connector until
you hear a click sound.
CAUTION
Clamp the CN8 connector cable on the inverter side with a wire clamp securely.
31
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.3
Connection of the brake unit (BU type)
Connect the brake unit (BU type) correctly as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Remove the jumper
across terminals HB-PC and terminals TB-HC of the brake unit and fit it to across terminals PC-TB.
ON
OFF
T*1
MC
Inverter
MC
MCCB
Three-phase
AC power
supply
U
Motor
R/L1
V
IM
S/L2
W
MC
Brake unit
(BU type)
T/L3
Remove the
jumper
TB
N/-
N
OCR HC
P/+
HB
HA
Discharging
resistor
OCR
PC
PR
Fit a jumper
P
*1
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
CAUTION
⋅ The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and discharging resistor should be within 2m. If twisted wires are used, the
distance should be within 5m.
⋅ If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a
magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off a current in case of fault.
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
2.5.4
Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC/MT-HC)
When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as shown below.
Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter.
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied).)
(1) Connection with the FR-HC (55K or less)
High power factor converter
Outside box
(FR-HCB)
Reactor1
(FR-HCL01)
MCCB
Three-phase
AC power
supply
*1
*2
*3
*4
(FR-HC)
MC1
MC2
Reactor2
(FR-HCL02)
Inverter
MC1
MC2
Motor
R/L1
S/L2 *1
T/L3
U
V
W
IM
MC
R
S
T
R2
S2
T2
R2
S2
T2
R3
S3
T3
R3 R4
S3 S4
T3 T4
R4
S4
T4
P
N
Y1orY2
RDY
RSO
R
phase SE
S
detection
T
*4
P/+ *2
N/X11 *3
X10 *3
RES
SD
R1/L11
S1/L21
*1
Remove the jumpers across the inverter terminals R/L1-R1/L11, S/L2-S1/L21, and connect the control circuit power supply to the R1/L11 and S1/
L21 terminals. Always keep the power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option fault)
will occur. (Refer to page 112.))
Do not insert the MCCB between terminals P/+ − N/- (P/+ − P/+, N/- − N/-). Opposite polarity of terminals N/-, P/+ will damage the inverter.
Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 (X11) signal. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied).)
For communication where the start command is sent only once, e.g. RS-485 communication operation, use the X11 signal when making setting to
hold the mode at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the FR-HC to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and connect terminal SE of the
FR-HC to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting, FR-HC will be damaged.
CAUTION
⋅ The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be matched.
⋅ Use sink logic (initial setting) when the FR-HC is connected. The FR-HC cannot be connected when source logic is selected.
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
32
Connection of stand-alone option units
(2) Connection with the MT-HC (75K or more)
MT-HCL01
MCCB
R R2
S S2
T T2
Three-phase
AC power
supply
MT-HCB
MT-HCL02
MT-HC
Inverter
MC
R2
S2
T2
R3
S3
T3
88R
88S
R1
R3 R4
S3 S4
T3 T4
R4
S4
T4
R/L1
U
S/L2 *1 V
T/L3
W
88R
88S
P
N
S1
RDY
RSO
SE
R
S
T
Motor
IM
P/+ *2
N/
*5
X10 *3
RES
SD
*1
R1 S1
R1/ S1/
L11 L21
MT-HCTR
*4
Isolated transformer
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Remove the jumper across terminals R-R1, S-S1 of the inverter, and connect the control circuit power
supply to the R1 and S1 terminals. The power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 must be open. Incorrect
connection will damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option fault) will occur. (Refer to page 112.)
Do not insert the MCCB between terminals P/+ − N/- (P/+ − P/+, N/- − N/-). Opposite polarity of terminals
N, P will damage the inverter.
Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 (X11) signal.
(Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).) For communication where the start command is
sent only once, e.g. RS-485 communication operation, use the X11 signal when making setting to hold the
mode at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual
(applied).)
Connect the power supply to terminals R1 and S1 of the MT-HC via an isolated transformer.
Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the MT-HC to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the
inverter, and connect terminal SE of the MT-HC to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting,
MT-HC will be damaged.
CAUTION
⋅ Use sink logic (initial setting) when the MT-HC is connected. The MT-HC cannot be connected when source logic is
selected.
⋅ The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be matched.
⋅ When connecting the inverter to the MT-HC, do not connect the DC reactor provided to the inverter.
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2
33
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.5
Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)(55K or less)
When connecting the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), make connection so that the inverter terminals
(P/+, N/-) and the terminal symbols of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) are the same.
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to the chapter 4 of the
Instruction Manual (applied).)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Dedicated stand-alone
reactor (FR-CVL)
MCCB
Three-phase
AC power
supply
MC1
R/L11
S/L21
T/L31
R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32
R/L11
S/L21 *4
T/MC1
*2
*3
*4
*5
V
IM
W
Inverter
P/L+
N/L−
P/+
N/−
P24
SD
RDYA
PC
SD
RDYB
RSO
SE
*1
R1/L11
S1/L21
FR-CV type
Power regeneration
common converter
R2/L1
S2/L2
T2/L3
U
*1
*2
*5
X10 *3
RES
Remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21 of the inverter, and connect the
control circuit power supply across terminals R1/L11-S1/L21. Always keep the power input terminals R/
L1, S/L2, T/L3 open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option fault) will occur. (Refer
to page 112.))
Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals P/+ − N/- (between P/L+ − P/+, between N/L- − N/-).
Opposite polarity of terminals N/-, P/+ will damage the inverter.
Assign the terminal for X10 signal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
(Refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1.
Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common converter.
Be sure to connect terminal RDYB of the FR-CV to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the
inverter, and connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting,
FR-CV will be damaged.
CAUTION
⋅ The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 and terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, T2/L3 must be matched.
⋅ Use sink logic (initial setting) when the FR-CV is connected. The FR-CV cannot be connected when source logic is
selected.
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1.
34
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.5.6
Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC) (75K or more)
When connecting a power regeneration converter (MT-RC), perform wiring securely as shown below. Incorrect
connection will damage the regeneration converter and inverter. After connecting securely, set "1" in
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and "0" in Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty.
Inverter
MCCB
MC2
MC1
U
R/L1
Three-phase
AC power
supply
S/L2
V
T/L3
W
IM
R1/L11
S1/L21
DCL
P1
P1
P/+ N/
P
MT-RCL
P
R
R2
S
S2
T
T2
N
R2
Reset signal
RES
STF
SD
S2
C
T2
B
Alarm signal
A
R
S
RDY
T
Ready signal
R1
SE
MT-RC
CAUTION
⋅ When using the FR-F700 series together with the MTInverter input power supply (MC2)
RC, install a magnetic contactor (MC) at the input side of
the inverter so that power is supplied to the inverter after
1s or more has elapsed after powering on the MT-RC.
MT-RC power supply (MC1)
When power is supplied to the inverter prior to the MTRC, the inverter and the MT-RC may be damaged or the
MCCB may trip or be damaged.
⋅ Refer to the MT-RC manual for precautions for
connecting the power coordination reactor and others.
2.5.7
ON
ON
1s or more
Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL)
When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it between terminals P1-P/+.
For the 55K or less, the jumper connected across terminals P1-P/+ must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not
exhibit its performance.
For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor.
P1
P/+
FR-HEL
Remove
the jumper.
CAUTION
⋅ The wiring distance should be within 5m.
⋅ The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).(Refer to page 14)
35
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2
S1
Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)
2.6 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)
(1) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes.
Refer to page 3 for selection.)
(
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g.
emergency stop operation).
2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure
3) While the power is ON, inverter is consuming a little power even during inverter stop. When stopping the inverter for
an extended period of time, powering OFF the inverter will save power slightly.
4) To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work
The inverter's input side MC is used for the above purpose, select class JEM1038-AC3MC for the inverter input side
current when making an emergency stop during normal operation.
REMARKS
Since repeated inrush current at power on will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is 100 million times (about
500,000 times for the 200V class 37K or more)), frequent starts/stops must be avoided. Turn on/off the inverter start controlling
terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
MCCB
• Inverter start/stop circuit example
MC
Power
supply
R/L1
U
As shown on the left, always use the start signal
S/L2
V
To the (ON or OFF of STF (STR) signal) to make a start
motor
T/L3
W
R1/L11
*2
S1/L21
T *1
Inverter
Operation preparation
MC
OFF
ON
MC
Stop
B1
*1 When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
*2 Connect the power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21
of the control circuit to the primary side of the MC to
hold an alarm signal when the inverter's protective
circuit is activated. At this time, remove jumpers
across terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21.
(Refer to page 17 for removal of the jumper.)
A1
MC
Start/Stop
Start
C1
or stop.
RA
RA
STF(STR)
SD
RA
(2) Handling of the inverter output side magnetic contactor
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop.
When the magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and
such will activate. When an MC is provided to switch to a commercial power supply, for example, it is recommended to
use bypass operation Pr. 135 to Pr. 139 (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied)).
36
Precautions for use of the inverter
2.7 Precautions for use of the inverter
The FR-F700 series is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method
may shorten the product life or damage the product.
Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
(1) Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
(2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
(3) After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in
an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
(4) Use cables of the size to make a voltage drop 2% maximum.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque
to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
Refer to page 14 for the recommended cable sizes.
(5)
The overall wiring length should be 500m maximum.
Especially for long distance wiring, the fast-response current limit function may decrease or the equipment connected to the
secondary side may malfunction or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacity of the
wiring. Therefore, note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 16.)
(6) Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize
interference. (Refer to page 9)
(7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices is
installed, immediately remove it.
For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing the
inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and then make sure that
the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+-N/- of the inverter is not more than 30VDC using a tester, etc.
(9) A short circuit or earth (ground) fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by
peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation
resistance may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and phase to phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-on.
Especially for an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.
(10) Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter.
Always use the start signal (ON/OFF of STF and STR signals) to start/stop the inverter. (Refer to page 8)
(11) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits.
Application of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may
damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected
incorrectly to short terminals 10E-5.
(12) Provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and
MC2 which are used for bypass operation.
When the wiring is incorrect or if there is an electronic
bypass circuit as shown on the right, the inverter will be
damaged when the power supply is connected to the
inverter U, V, W terminals due to arcs generated at the time
of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence error.
MC1
Power
supply
Interlock
R/L1 U
IM
S/L2 V
MC2
T/L3 W Undesirable current
Inverter
37
2
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
(8)
Precautions for use of the inverter
(13) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor in the
inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the
power is restored.
(14) Instructions for overload operation
When performing an operation of frequent start/stop of the inverter, increase/decrease in the temperature of the
transistor element of the inverter may repeat due to a continuous flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal
fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing bound current,
starting current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient
torque and the inverter may not start. Therefore, increase the inverter capacity to have enough allowance for current.
(15) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
(16) If electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter causes frequency setting signal to fluctuate and motor rotation
speed to be unstable when changing motor speed with analog signal, the following countermeasures are effective.
· Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
· Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables (inverter I/O cables).
· Use shield cables as signal cables.
· Install a ferrite core on the signal cable (Example: ZCAT3035-1330 TDK).
38
Failsafe of the system which uses
the inverter
2.8 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips to output a fault signal. However, a fault output signal may not be output at an inverter
fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although Mitsubishi assures best quality products,
provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents such as damage to machine when the
inverter fails for some reason and at the same time consider the system configuration where failsafe from outside the inverter,
without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.
(1) Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals
By combining the inverter status output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter alarm can be
detected.
No
Interlock Method
Check Method
Used Signals
1)
Inverter protective
function operation
Operation check of an alarm contact
Circuit error detection by negative logic
Fault output signal
ALM signal
2)
Inverter running status
Operation ready signal check
Operation ready signal
(RY signal)
3)
Inverter running status
Logic check of the start signal and
running signal
4)
Inverter running status
Logic check of the start signal and
output current
Start signal
(STF signal, STR signal)
Running signal (RUN signal)
Start signal
(STF signal, STR signal)
Output current detection signal
Y12 signal
Refer to Page
Refer to the chapter
4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied)).
Refer to the chapter
4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied)).
Refer to the chapter
4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied)).
Refer to the chapter
4 of the Instruction
Manual (applied)).
(2) Backup method outside the inverter
Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure
status of the inverter itself. For example, when the inverter CPU fails, even if the interlock is provided using the inverter
fault signal, start signal and RUN signal, there is a case where a fault signal is not output and RUN signal is kept output
even if an inverter fault occurs.
Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current and consider the
backup system such as checking up as below according to the level of importance of the system.
2
Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to
the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the motor
current runs as the motor is running for the period until the motor stops since the inverter starts decelerating even if the
start signal turns off. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time. In addition, it is
recommended to check the three-phase current when using the current detector.
2) Command speed and actual operation check
Check if there is no gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter speed command
and detected speed of the speed detector.
Controller
System failure
Inverter
Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)
To the alarm detection sensor
39
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
1) Start signal and actual operation check
Step of operation
3 DRIVE THE MOTOR
3.1 Step of operation
The inverter needs frequency command and start command. Frequency command (set frequency) determines the
rotation speed of the motor. Turning ON the start command starts the motor to rotate.
Refer to the flow chart below to perform setting.
Step
Step of
off operation
op
operation
Frequency
: Initial setting
Frequency command
Inverter
output
frequency
(Hz)
Frequency
command
ON
Installation/mounting
{Refer to page 7}
Wiring of the power
supply and motor
{Refer to page 10}
Time
(S)
Start command using the PU connector and
RS-485 terminal of the inverter and plug-in
option (Communication)
How
to give a start
command?
Refer to the chapter 4 of
Connect a switch, relay, etc.
to the control circuit
terminal block of the inverter
to give a start command. (External)
Start command with
on the operation panel (PU)
How to
give a frequency
command?
How to
give a frequency
command?
(PU)
Change frequency
with ON/OFF switches
connected to terminals
(multi-speed setting)
(External)
Perform frequency
setting by a current
output device
(Connection across
terminals 4-5)
(External)
{Refer to page 48}
{Refer to page 51}
{Refer to page 55}
Set from the
PU (FR-DU07/
FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
the Instruction Manual (applied)
Set from the
PU (FR-DU07/
FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
(PU)
{Refer to page 57}
Perform frequency
setting by a voltage
output device
(Connection across
terminals 2-5)
(External)
{Refer to page 53}
Change of frequency
with ON/OFF switches
connected to terminals
(multi-speed setting)
(External)
Perform frequency
setting by a current
output device
(Connection across
terminals 4-5)
(External)
{Refer to page 59}
{Refer to page 63}
Perform frequency
setting by a voltage
output device
(Connection across
terminals 2-5)
(External)
{Refer to page 61}
CAUTION
Check the following points before powering on the inverter.
· Check that the inverter is installed correctly in a correct place. (Refer to page 7)
· Check that wiring is correct. (Refer to page 8)
· Check that no load is connected to the motor.
·When protecting the motor from overheat by the inverter, set Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay (Refer to
page 46)
·When the rated frequency of the motor is 50Hz, set Pr.3 Base frequency (Refer to page 47)
40
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2.1
Parts of the operation panel (FR-DU07)
Operation mode indication
PU: Lit to indicate PU operation mode.
EXT: Lit to indicate External operation mode.
NET: Lit to indicate Network operation mode.
Rotation direction indication
FWD: Lit during forward rotation
REV: Lit during reverse rotation
On:
Forward/reverse operation
Flickering: When the frequency command is
not given even if the
forward/reverse command is given.
When the MRS signal is input.
Unit indication
· Hz: Lit to indicate frequency.
· A: Lit to indicate current.
· V: Lit to indicate voltage.
(Flicker when the set frequency monitor is
displayed.)
Monitor indication
Lit to indicate monitoring mode.
No function
Monitor(4-digit LED)
Shows the frequency, parameter
number, etc.
Start command
forward rotation
Start command
reverse rotation
Setting dial
Stop operation
Used to stop Run command.
Fault can be reset when
protective function is
activated (fault).
Used to change the
frequency setting and
parameter values.
Used to set each setting.
If pressed during operation, monitor
changes as below;
Mode
switchover
Used to change
each setting mode.
Running
frequency
Output
current
Output
voltage
*
* Energy saving monitor is displayed when the
energy saving monitor of Pr. 52 is set.
Operation mode switchover
Used to switch between the PU and External operation mode.
When using the External operation mode (operation using a separately
connected frequency setting potentiometer and start signal), press this key to
light up the EXT indication. (Change the Pr.79 value to use the combined mode.)
PU: PU operation mode
EXT: External operation mode
41
3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
(Setting dial: Mitsubishi inverter
dial)
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2.2
Basic operation (factory setting)
Operation mode switchover
At powering on (External operation mode)
PU Jog operation mode
Parameter setting
Monitor/frequency setting
(Refer to page 45)
(Example)
Value change
PU operation mode
(output frequency monitor)
and frequency flicker.
Frequency setting has been
written and completed!!
Output current monitor
Output voltage monitor
Displays the present
setting
Parameter setting mode
(Example)
Value change
Parameter and a setting value
flicker alternately.
Parameter write is completed!!
Parameter clear
Parameter
all clear
Fault clear
Faults history
Parameter copy
42
[Operation for displaying faults history] (Refer to page 116)
Past eight faults can be displayed.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault history exists,
is displayed.
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2.3
Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s))
Operation using the setting dial and key of the operation panel can be invalid to prevent parameter change, and
unexpected start or frequency setting.
· Set "10 or 11" in Pr. 161, then press
for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid.
· When the setting dial and key operation are invalid,
appears on the operation panel.
If dial and key operation is attempted while dial and key operation are invalid,
key is not touched for 2s, the monitor display appears.)
· To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press
appears. (When dial or
for 2s.
POINT
Set "0" (extended mode parameter valid) in Pr.160 User group read selection.
Set "10 or 11" (key lock valid) in Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Operation
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
PU indication is lit.
2.Press
to choose the PU
operation mode.
The parameter
number read
previously
appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
5.Press
"
until
(Pr. 160) appears.
to read the currently set value.
"(initial value) appears.
6.Turn
to change
it to the setting value of "
3
to set.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
7.Press
".
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
8.Change Pr. 161 to the setting value of "
in the similar manner.
(Refer to step 4 to 7.)
9.Press
"
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
for 2s to show the key lock.
Press for 2s.
Functions valid even in the operation lock status
Stop and reset with
.
CAUTION
Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
43
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2.4
Monitoring of output current and output voltage
POINT
Monitor display of output frequency, output current and output voltage can be changed by pushing
during
monitoring mode.
Operation
Display
1.Press
during operation to choose the output
frequency monitor
2.Independently of whether the inverter is running
in any operation mode or at a stop, the output
current monitor appears by pressing
3.Press
3.2.5
to show the output voltage monitor.
First priority monitor
Hold down
for 1s to set monitor description to be appeared first in the monitor mode.
(To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down
3.2.6
for 1s after displaying the output frequency monitor.)
Setting dial push
Push the setting dial (
44
.
) to display the set frequency currently set.
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2.7
Changing the parameter setting value
Changing example
Change the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency .
Operation
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indication is lit.
to choose the PU operation
mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.
Pr. 1) appears.
5.Press
"
6.Turn
value "
7.Press
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
to change it to the set
".
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
to
· Turn
to read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
· Press
twice to return the monitor to frequency monitor.
are displayed ... Why?
appears. ...... Write disable error
appears. ...... Calibration error
appears. ...... Mode designation error
For details refer to page 104.
REMARKS
⋅ The number of digits displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) is four. Only the upper four digits of values can be displayed
and set. If the values to be displayed have five digits or more including decimal places, the fifth or later numerals cannot be
displayed nor set.
(Example) When Pr.1
When 60Hz is set, 60.00 is displayed.
When 120Hz is set, 120.0 is displayed. The second decimal places cannot be displayed nor set.
45
DRIVE THE MOTOR
3
appears. ...... Write error during operation
Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)
3.3 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)
Set the rated motor current in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay to protect the motor from overheat.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial Value
9
Electronic thermal O/L relay
Rated inverter
current *1
*1
*2
Setting Range *2
55K or less
75K or more
Description
0 to 500A
0 to 3600A
Set the rated motor current.
Refer to page 134 for the rated inverter current value.
The minimum setting increments are 0.01A for the 55K or less and 0.1A for the 75K or more.
Changing example
Change the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting to 2.0A according to the motor rated current.
(FR-F740-0.75K)
Operation
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indication is lit.
to choose the PU
operation mode.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
until "
The parameter number
read previously appears.
"(Pr. 9
Electronic thermal O/L relay) appears.
Refer to page
134 for initial
value of the
inverter rated
current.
5.Press
to show the present
set value. (2.1A for 0.75K)
6.Turn
to change
the set value to "
7.Press
". (2.0A)
to set.
Flicker
· By turning
··· Parameter
setting complete!!
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
CAUTION
· Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid
unnecessary reset and power-off.
· When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
· When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
· A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use an external thermal relay.
· PTC thermistor output built-in the motor can be input to the PTC signal (AU terminal). For details, refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).
· Electronic thermal relay may not function when 5% or less of inverter rated current is set to electronic thermal relay setting.
46
When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz
(Pr. 3)
3.4 When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3)
First, check the motor rating plate. If a frequency given on the rating plate is "50Hz" only, always set Pr. 3 Base frequency
to "50Hz". If it remains at "60Hz", the voltage may become too low and torque shortage occurs, resulting in an overload
trip. It may result in an inverter trip (E.OC…) due to overload.
Parameter
Number
Initial Value
Setting Range
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
Base frequency
Description
Set the frequency when the motor
rated torque is generated.
Changing example Change Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz according to the motor rated frequency.
Operation
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indication is lit.
to choose the PU operation
mode.
The parameter
number
read previously
appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
until Pr. 3 Base frequency
appears.
5.Press
to show the present set
value. (60Hz)
6.Turn
value to "
7.Press
to change the set
". (50Hz)
to set.
Flicker
· By turning
··· Parameter
setting complete!!
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
3
Name
47
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
3.5 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)
POINT
From where is the frequency command given?
·
·
·
·
·
Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the operation panel →Refer to 3.5.1 (Refer to page 48)
Operation using the setting dial as the potentiometer→Refer to 3.5.2 (Refer to page 50)
Change of frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to terminals →Refer to 3.5.3 (Refer to page 51)
Frequency setting using voltage input signal→Refer to 3.5.4 (Refer to page 53)
Frequency setting using current input signal→Refer to 3.5.5 (Refer to page 55)
3.5.1
Setting the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz)
POINT
Operation panel (FR-DU07) is used to give both of frequency and start commands in PU operation.
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
Operation example
Performing operation at 30Hz.
Operation
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indication is lit.
to choose the PU
operation mode.
3.Turn
to show the frequency "
(30.00Hz) you want to set.
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
"
Flickers for
about 5s
4.While the value is flickering,
press
to set the frequency.
If you do not press
, the value flickers for about 5s
and the display then returns to "
" (0.00Hz).
At this time, return to "Step 3" and set the frequency again.
After the value flickered for about 3s,
the display returns to "
5.Start
Press
acceleration
or
Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!
After 3s, the monitor display appears.
" (monitor display).
constant speed
to start running.
/
The frequency on the indication increases by
the Pr.7 Acceleration time, and "
"
(30.00Hz) appears.
6.To change the set frequency, perform the operation in above steps 3 and 4.
(Starting from the previously set frequency.)
Stop
7.Deceleration
Stop
Press
to stop.
The frequency on the indication decreases
by the Pr. 8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops
rotating with "
" (0.00Hz) displayed on the indication.
48
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
Operation cannot be performed at the set frequency ... Why?
Did you carry out step 4 within 5s after step 3? (Did you press
within 5s after turning
?)
The frequency does not change by turning
... Why?
Check to see if the operation mode selected is the External operation mode. (Press
to change to
the PU operation mode.)
Operation does not change to the PU operation mode ... Why?
Check that "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
Check that the start command is not on.
Change acceleration time
Pr. 7 (Refer to page 68)
Change deceleration time
Pr. 8 (Refer to page 68)
For example, limit the motor speed to 60Hz maximum.
Set "60Hz" in Pr. 1. (Refer to page 67)
REMARKS
· Press
can also be used like a potentiometer to perform operation. (Refer to page 50)
3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
·
to show the set frequency.
49
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
3.5.2
Using the setting dial like a potentiometer at the operation.
POINT
Set "0" (extended mode parameter valid) in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
Set "1" (setting dial potentiometer mode) in Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Operation example Change the frequency from 0Hz to 60Hz during operation
Operation
Display
1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2. Press
PU indication is lit.
to choose the PU operation
mode.
3. Press
The parameter number
previously read appears.
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4. Turn
5. Press
"
until
(Pr. 160) appears.
to read the present set value.
" (initial value) appears.
6. Turn
to change it to
the setting value of " ".
7. Press
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
8. Change Pr. 161 to the setting value of "
"
in the similar manner. (Refer to step 4 to 7.)
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
9. Mode/monitor check
Press
twice to choose
monitor/frequency monitor.
10. Press
(or
) to start the inverter.
11. Turn
until "
" appears.
The flickering frequency is the set frequency.
You need not press
.
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
REMARKS
· If flickering "60.00" turns to "0.0", the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection setting may not be "1".
· Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by merely turning
.
CAUTION
· When using setting dial, the frequency goes up to the set value of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency (initial value is 120Hz (55K or less)/
60Hz (75K or more)).
Adjust Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting according to the application.
50
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
3.5.3
Setting the frequency by switches (three-speed setting)
POINT
· To give a start command,
or
of the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used.
[Connection diagram]
Inverter
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
RH
RM
RL
SD
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
Output frequency (Hz)
· To give a frequency command, terminal between SD and terminal RH, RM, or RL is turned ON. (three-speed
setting)
· Pr. 79 Operation mode selection must be set to "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2)
RH
Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2
(Middle speed)
Speed 3
(Low speed)
ON
ON
RM
ON
RL
Operation example
Operate in low-speed (10Hz)
Operation
Display
1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2. Press
The parameter number
read previously appears.
to choose the parameter setting
mode.
3. Turn
until
(Pr. 79) appears.
4. Press
"
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
5. Turn
to change it to the
setting value " ".
to set.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
6. Press
3
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
7. Mode/monitor check
Press
twice to change to monitor /
frequency monitor.
[PU] indication and [EXT] indication are lit.
8. Start
Turn ON the low-speed switch (RL).
High speed
Low speed
ON
Middle speed
51
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
Operation
9. Acceleration
Press
or
Display
constant speed
/
to start running.
The frequency on the indication increases
by the Pr.7 Acceleration time, and "
"
(10.00Hz) appears.
10.
Deceleration
Press
to stop.
The frequency on the indication decreases
by the Pr. 8 Deceleration time, and the
motor stops rotating with "
" (0.00Hz)
displayed on the indication.
Stop
Low speed
OFF
11. STOP
Turn OFF the low-speed switch (RL). High speed
Middle speed
60Hz for the RH, 30Hz for the RM and 10Hz for the RL are not output when they are turned on ... Why?
Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again.
(Refer to page 67.)
Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1", Pr.
182 RH terminal function selection ="2", and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial values)
[FWD (or REV)] lamp is not lit ... Why?
Check that wiring is correct. Check the wiring once again.
Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "4".)
(Refer to page 71.)
Change the frequency of the terminal RL, RM, and RH. ... How?
Refer to page 59 to change the running frequency at each terminal in Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high
speed), Pr. 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed), and Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed).
REMARKS
· Initial value of terminal RH, RM, and RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (To change, set Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6.)
· In the initial setting, when two or more of multi-speed settings are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the set frequency
of the lower signal. For example, when RH and RM signals turn ON, RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority.
· Maximum of 15-speed operation can be performed. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
52
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
3.5.4
Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input)
POINT
· To give a start command,
or
of the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used .
· Frequency command is given from the potentiometer. (by connecting terminal 2 and 5.)
· Pr. 79 Operation mode selection must be set to "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).
[Connection diagram]
(The inverter supplies 5V of power to the frequency setting potentiometer.(Terminal 10))
Inverter
Frequency setting
potentiometer
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
10
2
5
Operation example Performing operation at 60Hz.
Operation
Display
1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2. Press
The parameter number
read previously appears.
to choose the parameter setting
mode.
3. Turn
until
(Pr. 79) appears.
4. Press
"
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
5. Turn
to change it to
the setting value " ".
6. Press
to set.
3
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
DRIVE THE MOTOR
7. Mode/monitor check
Press
twice to choose the
monitor/frequency monitor.
[PU] indication and [EXT] indication are lit.
8. Start
Press
or
.
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency
command is given.
/
Flickering
9. Acceleration → constant speed
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting
potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the indication
increases according to Pr. 7 Acceleration
time until "
"(60Hz) is displayed.
53
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
Operation
Display
10. Deceleration
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting
potentiometer) counterclockwise slowly to full.
The frequency on the indication decreases
by the Pr. 8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops
rotating with "
" (0.00Hz) displayed on the
indication.
[FWD] indication or [REV] indication flickers.
Stop
Flickering
11. Stop
Press
.
[FWD] indication or [REV] indication turns OFF.
Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 5V)
Adjust the frequency in Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 62.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to the
chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
54
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
3.5.5
Setting the frequency by analog input (current input)
POINT
· To give a start command,
or
of the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used.
· Frequency command is given from the current signal source (4 to 20mA). (by connecting terminal 4 and 5.)
· Turn the AU signal on.
· Pr. 79 Operation mode selection must be set to "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).
[Connection diagram]
Inverter
AU signal
AU
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
SD
Current signal
source
(4 to 20mADC)
4 (+)
5 (-)
Operation example Performing operation at 60Hz.
Operation
Display
1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2. Press
to choose the parameter setting mode.
3. Turn
until
The parameter number
read previously appears.
(Pr. 79) appears.
4. Press
to read the present set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
5. Turn
value "
6. Press
to change it to the setting
".
3
to set.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
7. Mode/monitor check
Press
twice to choose the monitor/frequency
monitor.
[PU] indication and [EXT] indication are lit.
8. Start
Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal
(AU) is on.
Press
or
.
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency
command is given.
/
Flickering
55
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
Operation
Display
9. Acceleration → constant speed
Perform 20mA input.
The frequency on the indication increases by
"
the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and "
(60.00Hz) appears.
10. Deceleration
Input 4mA or less.
The frequency on the indication decreases
by the Pr. 8 Deceleration time, and the motor
stops rotating with "
" (0.00Hz) displayed
on the indication.
[FWD] indication or [EXT] indication flickers.
Current signal
source
(20mADC)
Current signal
source
(4mADC)
Flickering
Stop
11. Stop
Press
.
[FWD] indication or [REV] indication turns OFF.
REMARKS
Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
Manual (applied).)
the Instruction
Change the frequency (60Hz) at the maximum current input (at 20mA, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 64.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) at the minimum current input (at 4mA, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to
the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
56
Start and stop using terminals (External
operation)
3.6 Start and stop using terminals (External operation)
POINT
From where is the frequency command given?
·
·
·
·
Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the operation panel → Refer to 3.6.1(Refer to page 57)
Give a frequency command by switch (multi-speed setting) → Refer to 3.6.2 (Refer to page 59)
Perform frequency setting using voltage input signal → Refer to 3.6.3 (Refer to page 61)
Perform frequency setting using current input signal → Refer to 3.6.5 (Refer to page 63)
3.6.1
Setting the frequency by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3)
POINT
· Switch STF(STR) signal on to give a start command.
· Use (
) on the operation panel (FR-DU07) to give a frequency command.
· Pr. 79 Operation mode selection must be set to "3" (External/PU combination operation mode 1).
[Connection diagram]
Inverter
Forward rotation
start
Reverse rotation
start
STF
STR
SD
Operation panel
(FR-DU07)
Performing operation at 30Hz.
Operation example
Operation
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
to choose the PU
operation mode.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
until
PU indication is lit.
3
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
2.Press
(Pr. 79) appears.
5.Press
"
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
6.Turn
to change it to the
setting value "
7.Press
".
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
8. Mode/monitor check
Press
twice to choose the
monitor/frequency monitor.
[PU] indication and [EXT] indication are lit.
57
Start and stop using terminals (External
operation)
Operation
9. Turn
Display
to show the selected
frequency, "
Flickers for about 5s
" (30.00Hz).
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
10.While the value is flickering,
press
to set the frequency.
If you do not press
,the value flickers
for about 5s and the display then returns
to
(display) Hz.
At this time, return to "Step 8" and set
the frequency again.
Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!
After 3s, the monitor display appears.
After about 3s of flickering of the value,
the indication goes back to "
" (monitor display).
11.Start
acceleration constant speed
Forward
rotation Reverse
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR).
rotation
The frequency on the indication increases
ON
by the Pr.7 Acceleration time, and "
"
(30.00Hz) appears.
[FWD] indication is lit during forward rotation,
and [REV] indication is lit during reverse rotation.
CAUTION
When both of STF and STR signals are turned
ON, the inverter cannot start.
If both are turned ON while the inverter is
running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
12.To change the set frequency, perform the operation in above steps 9 and 10.
(Starting from the previously set frequency.)
13.Deceleration
Forward
Stop
rotation Reverse
Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR).
rotation
The frequency on the indication
decreases by the Pr. 8 Deceleration time,
OFF
and the motor stops rotating with
"
" (0.00Hz) displayed on the indication.
Stop
REMARKS
· Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
(all are initial values)
· When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection is set to "3", multi-speed operation (refer to page 59) is also valid.
When the inverter is stopped by
of the operation panel (FR-DU07),
displayed alternately.
1. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
2. The display can be reset by
58
.
and
are
Flickering
Start and stop using terminals (External
operation)
3.6.2
Setting the frequency by switches (three-speed setting) (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6)
POINT
· Start command by terminal STF (STR)
· Frequency command by terminal RH, RM, RL and STR
· [EXT] must be lit. (When [PU] is lit, switch it to [EXT] with
.)
· The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (Use Pr. 4, Pr. 5 and Pr. 6 to change.)
· Operation at 7-speed can be performed by turning two (or three) terminals simultaneously. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
[Connection diagram]
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
Output frequency (Hz)
Inverter
STF
STR
RH
RM
RL
SD
Speed 1
(High speed)
RH
Speed 2
(Middle speed)
Speed 3
(Low speed)
ON
RM
RL
ON
ON
Changing example Operation at high speed (60Hz).
Operation
1. Screen at powering on
Display
ON
The monitor display appears.
2. Turn ON the high-speed switch (RH).
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
ON
3. Acceleration → constant speed
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
3
ON
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR). The
frequency on the indication increases by the Pr. 7
Acceleration time, and "
" (60.00Hz) appears.
[FWD] indication is lit during forward rotation, and
[REV] indication is lit during reverse rotation.
When RM is turned ON, 30Hz is displayed.
When RL is turned ON, 10Hz is displayed.
CAUTION
When both of STF and STR signals are turned
ON, the inverter cannot start.
If both are turned ON while the inverter is
running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
4.Turn OFF the start switch (STF or STR).
The frequency on the indication decreases by the
OFF
Pr. 8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops
rotating with "
" (0.00Hz) displayed on the
indication.
[FWD] indication or [REV] indication turns OFF.
5. Stop
Turn OFF the high-speed switch (RH).
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Stop
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
OFF
59
Start and stop using terminals (External
operation)
[EXT] is not lit even when
is pressed ... Why?
Switchover of the operation mode with
is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
60Hz, 30Hz and 10Hz are not output from RH, RM and RL respectively when they are turned on. ... Why?
Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again. (Refer to
page 67)
Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "0" or "2".) (Refer to page 71)
Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1",
Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection = "2" and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial
values)
[FWD (or REV)] is not lit. ... Why?
Check that wiring is correct. Check it again.
Check that "60" is set in Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection (or "61" is set in Pr. 179 STR terminal
function selection)?
(all are initial values)
How is the frequency setting from 4 to 7 speed ?
In the initial setting, when two or more of multi-speed settings are simultaneously selected, priority is
given to the set frequency of the lower signal. For example, when RH and RM signals turn ON, the
RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority. By setting Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 (multi-speed setting), up to 7- speed
can be set by combinations of RH, RM, and RL signals. Refer to the chapter 4 of
Manual (applied).
the Instruction
Perform multi-speed operation more than 8 speed. ... How?
Use the REX signal to perform the operation. Maximum of 15-speed operation can be performed.
Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).
REMARKS
· External operation is fixed by setting "2" (External operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection when you do not want to take
time pressing
60
or when you want to use the current start command and frequency command. (Refer to page 71)
Start and stop using terminals (External
operation)
3.6.3
Setting the frequency by analog input (voltage input)
POINT
· To give a start command, terminal between SD and STF (STR) is turned ON.
· Frequency command is given from the potentiometer (by connecting terminal 2 and 5).
[Connection diagram]
(The inverter supplies 5V of power to frequency setting potentiometer. (Terminal 10))
Inverter
STF
STR
SD
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
10
2
5
Frequency setting
potentiometer
Operation example Performing operation at 60Hz.
Operation
1.Screen at powering on
ON
Display
The monitor display appears.
2.Start
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency
command is given.
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
ON
Flickering
CAUTION
When both of STF and STR signals are turned
ON, the inverter cannot start.
If both are turned ON while the inverter is
running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
3. Acceleration → constant speed
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting
potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency on the indication increases by the Pr.7
3
DRIVE THE MOTOR
Acceleration time, and "
" (60.00Hz) appears.
[FWD] indication is lit during forward rotation, and
[REV] indication is lit during reverse rotation.
4. Deceleration
Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting
potentiometer) counterclockwise slowly to full.
The frequency on the indication decreases by the
Pr. 8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops rotating
with "
" (0.00Hz) displayed on the indication.
[FWD] indication or [EXT] indication flickers.
5.Stop
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
[FWD] indication or [REV] indication turns OFF.
Flickering
Stop
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
OFF
When you want to operate in the External operation mode always at powering on or when you want to
save the trouble of
input, set "2" (External operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection to
choose External operation mode always.
61
Start and stop using terminals (External
operation)
REMARKS
Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
(all are initial values)
The motor will not rotate ... Why?
Check that [EXT] is lit.
[EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
Use
to lit [EXT].
Check that wiring is correct. Check once again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to the
chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
When you want to compensate frequency setting, use terminal 1.
For details, refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).
3.6.4
Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum voltage
input (5V, initial value)
<How to change the maximum frequency>
Changing example
When you use the 0 to 5VDC input to change frequency at 5V from 60Hz (initial value) to
50Hz, set "50Hz" in Pr. 125.
Operation
1.Turn
2.Press
"
3.Turn
to "
4.Press
until
Display
(Pr. 125) appears.
to show the present set value.
"(60.00Hz)
to change the set value
". (50.00Hz)
to set.
Flicker
5.Mode/monitor check
Press
··· 50Hz output at 5V input complete!!
twice to choose the monitor/frequency monitor.
6.To check the setting, turn the start switch (STF or STR) on
and input 5V (turn the potentiometer clockwise slowly to full.)
(Refer to 3.6.3 steps 2 to 5)
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
Manual (applied).)
the Instruction
Output frequency
(Hz)
The frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM-SD does not indicate exactly 50Hz ... Why?
The meter can be adjusted by calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration. (Refer to the chapter 4
of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Set frequency at 0V using calibration
Initial value
parameter C2 and adjust the indicator using
60Hz
calibration parameter C0.
Gain Pr.125
Bias
C2
(Pr. 902)
0
0
Frequency setting signal
0
C3 (Pr. 902)
100%
5V
10V
C4 (Pr. 903)
REMARKS
As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied to across
terminals 2-5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied.
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied) for the setting method of calibration parameter C4.)
62
Start and stop using terminals (External
operation)
3.6.5
Setting the frequency by analog input (current input)
POINT
· Switch terminal STF(STR)-SD on to give a start command.
· Turn the AU signal on.
· Set "2" (External operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
[Connection diagram]
Inverter
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
STF
STR
AU
SD
Current signal
source
(4 to 20mADC)
4(+)
5(-)
Operation
1.Screen at powering on
Display
ON
The monitor display appears.
2.Start
Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal
(AU) is ON.
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
[FWD] or [REV] is flickering as no frequency
command is given.
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
ON
Flickering
CAUTION
When both of STF and STR signals are turned
ON, the inverter cannot start.
If both are turned ON while the inverter is
running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
3.Acceleration → constant speed
Perform 20mA input.
Current signal
The frequency on the indication increases by
source
the Pr.7 Acceleration time, and "
"
(20mADC)
(60.00Hz) appears.
[FWD] indication is lit during forward rotation,
and [REV] indication is lit during reverse rotation.
Input 4mA or less.
The frequency on the indication decreases
by the Pr. 8 Deceleration time, and the motor stops
rotating with "
" (0.00Hz) displayed on the
indication.
[FWD] indication or [EXT] indication flickers.
5.Stop
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
[FWD] indication or [REV] indication turns OFF.
DRIVE THE MOTOR
4.Deceleration
3
Current signal
source
(4mADC)
Flickering
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
Stop
OFF
REMARKS
Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
(applied).)
the Instruction Manual
63
Start and stop using terminals (External
operation)
The motor will not rotate ... Why?
Check that [EXT] is lit.
[EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
Use
PU
EXT
to lit [EXT].
Check that the AU signal is on.
Turn the AU signal on.
Check that wiring is correct. Check it again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4mA)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency.
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
3.6.6
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Changing the output frequency (60Hz, initial value) at the maximum current input
(at 20mA, initial value)
<How to change the maximum frequency>
Changing example
When you use the 4 to 20mA input and want to change the frequency at 20mA from 60Hz (initial
value) to 50Hz, set "50Hz" in Pr. 126.
Operation
1.Turn
until
2.Press
to show the present set value.
"
Display
(Pr. 126) appears.
"(60.00Hz)
3.Turn
to change the set value to "
".
(50.00Hz)
4.Press
to set the value.
Flicker
··· 50Hz output at 20mA input complete!!
5.Mode/monitor check
Press
twice to choose the
monitor/frequency monitor.
6.To check the setting, turn the start switch (STF or STR)
on and input 20mA. (Refer to 3.6.5 steps 2 to 5)
The frequency meter (indicator) connected across terminals FM-SD does not indicate exactly 50Hz ... Why?
The meter can be adjusted by calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration.
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
Manual (applied).)
the Instruction
Output frequency
(Hz)
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
Set frequency at 4mA using calibration
parameter C5 and adjust the indicator using
60Hz
calibration parameter C0.
Bias
C5
(Pr. 904)
Initial value
Gain Pr. 126
100%
20
0
0
4 Frequency setting signal 20mA
C6 (Pr. 904)
C7 (Pr. 905)
REMARKS
As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied to across
terminals 4-5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied.
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied) for the setting method of calibration parameter C7.)
64
4 ADJUSTMENT
4.1 Simple mode parameter list
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set
the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can
be made from the operation panel (FR-DU07). For details of parameters, refer to the chapter 4 of
Manual (applied).
the Instruction
POINT
Only simple mode parameters are displayed by the initial setting of Pr. 160 User group read selection. Set Pr. 160 User
group read selection as required. (Refer to page 45 for parameter change.)
Pr. 160
Parameter
Number
Description
Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be displayed.
Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range
0.1%
6/4/3/2/
1.5/1%*1
Maximum
frequency
0.01Hz
120/
60Hz*2
0 to 120Hz
2
Minimum
frequency
0.01Hz
0Hz
0 to 120Hz
3
Base frequency
0.01Hz
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
30Hz
0 to 400Hz
0.01Hz
10Hz
0 to 400Hz
0.1s
5/15s*3
0 to 3600s
0.1s
10/30s*3
0 to 3600s
0
Torque boost
1
7
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
Acceleration time
8
Deceleration time
4
5
6
9
60
79
125
126
160
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
Energy saving
control selection
Operation mode
selection
Terminal 2
frequency setting
gain frequency
Terminal 4
frequency setting
gain frequency
User group read
selection
0 to 30%
Applications
Set to increase a starting torque or when the
motor with a load will not rotate, resulting in an
alarm [OL] and a trip [OC1]
*1
Initial values differ according to the inverter
capacity. (0.75K/1.5K to 3.7K/5.5K, 7.5K/11K to
37K/45K, 55K/75K or more)
Refer
to
66
Set when the maximum output frequency need
to be limited.
*2
Initial values differ according to the inverter
capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
Set when the minimum output frequency need
to be limited.
Set when the rated motor frequency is 50Hz.
Check the motor rating plate.
Set when changing the preset speed in the
parameter with a terminal.
67
47
59
Acceleration/deceleration time can be set.
*3
Initial values differ according to the inverter
capacity. (7.5K or less/11K or more)
Protect the motor from overheat by the inverter.
Set the rated motor current.
68
0.01/
0.1A*4
Rated
inverter
current
1
0
0, 4, 9
1
0
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7
0.01Hz
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
Frequency for the maximum value of the
potentiometer (at 5V) can be changed.
62
0.01Hz
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
Frequency at 20mA input can be changed.
64
1
9999
0, 1, 9999
Make extended parameters valid
—
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A*4
*4
Setting increments and setting range differ
according to the inverter capacity.
(55K or less/75K or more)
The inverter output voltage is minimized when
using for fan and pump applications.
Select the start command location and
frequency setting location.
46
69
71
65
4
ADJUSTMENT
9999
(Initial Value)
0
1
Simple mode parameter list
Simple mode parameter list
Increasing the starting torque (Pr. 0)
4.2 Increasing the starting torque (Pr. 0)
Set this parameter when "the motor with a load will not rotate", "an alarm [OL] is output, resulting in an inverter
trip due to [OC1], etc.
Parameter
Number
Name
0.75K
1.5K to 3.7K
0
Setting
Range
Initial Value
5.5K, 7.5K
Torque boost
11K to 37K
45K, 55K
75K or more
6%
4%
3%
2%
1.5%
1%
Changing example When the motor with a load will not rotate,
Description
Motor torque in the lowfrequency range can be
adjusted to the load to increase
the starting motor torque.
0 to 30%
100%
increase the Pr. 0 value 1% by 1% unit by
looking at the motor movement. (The guideline
is for about 10% change at the greatest.)
Output
voltage
Pr.0
Pr.46
Setting
range
0
Operation
Output
frequency
(Hz)
Base
frequency
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indication is lit.
to choose the PU operation mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.
Pr. 0) appears.
5.Press
to read the present set value.
"
"(initial value is 6% for the 0.75K)
appears.
6.Turn
"
The initial value
differs according
to the capacity.
to change it to the set value
".
7.Press
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· By turning
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
REMARKS
· A too large setting may cause the motor to overheat, resulting in an overcurrent trip (OL (overcurrent alarm) then E.OC1
(Overcurrent trip during acceleration)), thermal trip (E.THM (Motor overload trip), and E.THT (Inverter overload trip)).
When a fault (E.OC1) occurs, release the start command, and decrease the Pr. 0 value 1% by 1% to reset. (Refer to page 108.)
POINT
If the inverter still does not operate properly after the above measures, adjust Pr. 80 Motor capacity(Simple magnetic
flux vector control) [extended mode]. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
66
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Limiting the maximum and minimum
output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
4.3
Limiting the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
Parameter
Number
Name
Setting
Range
Initial Value
1
Maximum frequency
2
Minimum frequency
120Hz
60Hz
55K or less
75K or more
0Hz
0 to 120Hz
Description
Set the upper limit of the output
frequency.
0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
Changing example Limit the frequency set by the potentiometer,
etc. to 60Hz maximum.
(Set "60"Hz in Pr. 1 Maximum frequency.)
Clamped at the
maximum frequency
Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr.1
Pr.18
Frequency setting
Pr.2
0
Clamped at the (4mA)
minimum frequency
Operation
5, 10V
(20mA)
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indication is lit.
to choose the PU operation
mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.
Pr. 1) appears.
5.Press
"
6.Turn
value "
7.Press
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
to change it to the set
".
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
4
REMARKS
· The output frequency is clamped by the Pr. 2 setting even if the set frequency is lower than the Pr. 2 setting (The frequency will
not decrease to the Pr. 2 setting.)
Note that Pr. 15 Jog frequency has higher priority than the minimum frequency.
· When the Pr. 1 setting is changed, frequency higher than the Pr. 1 setting can not be set by
.
· When performing a high speed operation at 120Hz or more, setting of Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency is necessary.
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
CAUTION
If the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency value, note that the motor will run at the set
frequency according to the acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal on, without entry of
the command frequency.
67
ADJUSTMENT
· By turning
Changing acceleration and deceleration time
(Pr. 7, Pr. 8)
4.4 Changing acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)
Set in Pr. 7 Acceleration time a larger value for a slower speed increase and a smaller value for a faster speed increase.
Set in Pr. 8 Deceleration time a larger value for a slower speed decrease and a smaller value for a faster speed decrease.
Parameter
Number
Name
7
Acceleration time
8
Deceleration time
Setting
Range
Initial Value
7.5K or less
11K or more
7.5K or less
11K or more
5s
15s
10s
30s
Description
0 to 3600/
360s *
Set the motor acceleration time.
0 to 3600/
360s *
Set the motor deceleration time.
* Depends on the Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. The initial value for the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and setting increments is
"0.1s".
Change the Pr. 7 Acceleration time setting from "5s"
to "10s".
Pr.20
(60Hz)
Running
frequency
Output
frequency (Hz)
Changing example
Time
Acceleration Pr.7
time
Operation
Deceleration Pr.8
time
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indication is lit.
to choose the PU operation
mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.
Pr. 7) appears.
5.Press
"
The initial value
differs according
to the capacity.
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
6.Turn
value "
7.Press
to change it to the set
".
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· By turning
68
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
Energy saving operation (Pr. 60)
4.5 Energy saving operation (Pr. 60)
Without a fine parameter setting, the inverter automatically performs energy saving operation.
This inverter is appropriate for fan and pump applications
Parameter
Number
60
4.5.1
Name
Energy saving control selection
Initial
Value
Setting
Range
0
0
4
9
Remarks
Normal operation mode
Energy saving operation mode
Optimum excitation control mode
Energy saving operation mode (setting "4")
· When "4" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter operates in the energy saving operation mode.
· In the energy saving operation mode, the inverter automatically controls the output voltage to minimize the
inverter output voltage during a constant operation.
REMARKS
· For applications a large load torque is applied to or machines repeat frequent acceleration/deceleration, an energy saving
effect is not expected.
4.5.2
Optimum excitation control mode (setting "9")
· When "9" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter operates in the Optimum excitation control mode.
· The Optimum excitation control mode is a control method which controls excitation current to improve the motor
efficiency to maximum and determines output voltage as an energy saving method.
REMARKS
· When the motor capacity is too small as compared to the inverter capacity or two or more motors are connected to one
inverter, the energy saving effect is not expected.
CAUTION
· When the energy saving mode and Optimum excitation control mode are selected, deceleration time may be longer than
the setting value. Since overvoltage alarm tends to occur as compared to the constant-torque load characteristics, set a
longer deceleration time.
· The energy saving mode and Optimum excitation control functions only under V/F control.
When a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 80 Motor capacity (simple magnetic flux control), the energy saving mode and
Optimum excitation control does not function.
(For Simple magnetic flux vector control, refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
POINT
the Instruction Manual (applied) to
4
ADJUSTMENT
When you want to check the energy saving effect, refer to the chapter 4 of
check the energy saving effect monitor.
69
Energy saving operation (Pr. 60)
Operation
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indication is lit.
to choose the PU operation
mode.
The parameter
number previously
read appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
until
(Pr. 60)
appears.
5.Press
"
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
6.Turn
value "
7.Press
to change it to the set
".
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
8. Perform normal operation.
When you want to check the energy saving effect,
refer to the chapter 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied)
to check the energy saving effect monitor.
· By turning
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
REMARKS
If the motor decelerates to stop, the deceleration time may be longer than the set time. Since overvoltage tends to occur as
compared to the constant-torque characteristics, set a longer deceleration time.
70
Selection of the operation command and
frequency command locations (Pr. 79)
4.6 Selection of the operation command and frequency
command locations (Pr. 79)
Select the start command location and frequency command location.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
Setting
Range
LED Indication
: Off
: On
Description
External operation mode
Use external/PU switchover mode (press
to switch
0
between the PU and External operation mode. (Refer to
page 48))
At power on, the inverter is in the External operation
mode.
1
Fixed to PU operation mode
2
Fixed to External operation mode
Operation can be performed by switching between the NET operation mode
external and NET operation mode.
PU operation mode
External operation mode
External/PU combined operation mode 1
Running frequency
3
79
Operation
mode
selection
0
Start signal
PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/
FR-PU07) setting or
external signal input (multi- External signal input
speed setting, across
(terminal STF, STR)
terminals 4-5 (valid when
AU signal turns on)). *1
External/PU combined operation mode 2
Running frequency
4
External signal input
(Terminal 2, 4, 1, JOG,
multi-speed selection, etc.)
Start signal
Input from the PU (FRDU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
(
,
)
PU operation mode
6
Switchover mode
External operation mode
Switch among PU operation, external operating, and
NET operation while keeping the same operating status.
NET operation mode
*1
*2
The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal 4 analog
input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".
For the terminal used for the X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign
functions.
For Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).
When the X12 signal is not assigned, function of the MRS signal switches from MRS (output stop) to PU operation interlock signal.
71
4
ADJUSTMENT
7
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)
X12 signal ON *2
PU operation mode
Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation
mode.
External operation mode
(output stop during external operation)
X12 signal OFF *2
Operation mode can not be switched to the PU
operation mode.
Parameter clear, all parameter clear
4.7 Parameter clear, all parameter clear
POINT
· Set "1" in Pr. CL parameter clear, ALLC All parameter clear to initialize parameters. (Parameters are not cleared
when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.)
· Refer to the parameter list on page 78 for parameters to be cleared with this operation.
Operation
Display
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2.Press
PU indication is lit.
to choose the PU operation
mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
until "
", "
"
appears.
Parameter clear All parameter clear
5.Press
"
to read the currently set value.
"(initial value) appears.
6.Turn
to change it to
the setting value " ".
7.Press
Parameter clear All parameter clear
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· Turn
to read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
and
are displayed alternately ... Why?
The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1. Press
.
is lit and the monitor (4 digit LED) displays "0" (Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)).
2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.
72
Parameter copy and parameter verification
4.8 Parameter copy and parameter verification
PCPY Setting
Description
0
1
2
3
Cancel
Copy the source parameters to the operation panel.
Write the parameters copied to the operation panel into the destination inverter.
Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. (Refer to page 74.)
REMARKS
· When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-F700 series or parameter copy write is performed after parameter copy read is
stopped, "model error (
)" is displayed.
· Refer to the parameter list on page 78 and later for availability of parameter copy.
· When the power is turned off or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy write, perform write again or check the
values by parameter verification.
4.8.1
Parameter copy
Parameter settings can be copied to multiple inverters.
Display
Operation
1.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
• Connect it during a stop.
The parameter
number previously
read appears.
2.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3.Turn
until
(parameter copy)
appears.
4.Press
"
to to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
5.Turn
to change it to
the setting value " ".
6.Press
The frequency flickers
for about 30s
to copy the source parameters
to the operation panel.
About 30s later
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!
7.Connect the operation panel to the
4
copy source inverter.
turn
to change it to "
9.Press
ADJUSTMENT
8.After performing steps 2 to 5,
".
The frequency flickers
for about 30s
to write the parameters copied to
the operation panel to the destination inverter.
10.When copy is completed,
"
" and "
" flicker.
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!
11.After writing the parameter values to the copy
destination inverter, always reset the inverter,
e.g. switch power off once, before starting operation.
73
Parameter copy and parameter verification
appears...Why?
Parameter read error. Perform operation from step 3 again.
appears...Why?
Parameter write error. Perform operation from step 8 again.
and
flicker alternately
Appears when parameters are copied between the inverter of 55K or less and 75K or more.
1. Set "0" in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
2. Set the following setting (initial value) in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
55K or less
75K or more
10
100
Pr. 989 Setting
3. Reset Pr. 9, Pr. 30, Pr. 51, Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 56, Pr. 57, Pr. 70, Pr. 72, Pr. 80, Pr. 90, Pr. 158, Pr. 190 to Pr. 196, Pr. 557,
Pr. 893.
4.8.2
Parameter verification
Whether same parameter values are set in other inverters or not can be checked.
Operation
Display
1.Move the operation panel to the
inverter to be verified.
• Move it during a stop.
2.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
3.Press
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4.Turn
until
(parameter copy)
appears.
5.Press
to read the present set
value.
" "(initial value) appears.
6.Turn
to change it to the set value
" "(parameter copy verification mode).
7.Press
to read the parameter setting
of the verified inverter to the operation panel.
The frequency flickers
for about 30s
• If different parameters exist, different
parameter numbers and
• Hold down
flicker.
to verify.
8.If there is no difference,
Flickering
and
flicker to complete verification.
Flicker ··· Parameter verification complete!!
REMARKS
When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-F700 series, "model error (
)" is displayed.
flickers ... Why?
Set frequencies, etc. may be different. Check set frequencies.
74
Parameter list
4.9 Parameter list
4.9.1
List of parameters classified by the purpose
Set the parameters according to the operating conditions. The following list indicates purpose of use and
corresponding parameters.
Adjust the output torque of
the motor (current)
Limit the output frequency
Set V/F pattern
Frequency setting with
terminals (contact input)
Acceleration/deceleration
time/pattern adjustment
Selection and protection of a
motor
Motor brake and stop
operation
Function assignment of
external terminal and control
Monitor display and monitor
output signal
Detection of output frequency
and current
Parameter Number
Manual torque boost
Pr. 0, Pr. 46
Simple magnetic flux vector control
Pr. 80, Pr. 90
Slip compensation
Pr. 245 to Pr. 247
Stall prevention operation
Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 66, Pr.
148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154, Pr. 156, Pr. 157
Maximum/minimum frequency
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18
Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jump)
Pr. 31 to Pr. 36
Base frequency, voltage
Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47
V/F pattern matching applications
Pr. 14
Adjustable 5 points V/F
Pr. 71, Pr. 100 to Pr. 109
Multi-speed setting operation
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Jog operation
Pr. 15, Pr. 16
Input compensation of multi-speed and remote setting
Pr. 28
Remote setting function
Pr. 59
Acceleration/deceleration time setting
Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45
Starting frequency
Pr. 13, Pr. 571
Acceleration/deceleration pattern and backlash measures
Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143
Regeneration avoidance functions at deceleration
Pr. 882 to Pr. 886
Motor protection from overheat (electronic thermal relay
function)
Pr. 9, Pr. 51
Use the constant-torque motor (applied motor)
Pr. 71
DC injection brake
Pr. 10 to Pr. 12
Selection of regeneration unit
Pr. 30, Pr. 70
Selection of motor stopping method
Pr. 250
Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous power failure
Pr. 261 to Pr. 266
Motor coasts to a stop when the output frequency from the
inverter falls to the specified output frequency or lower.
Pr. 522
Function assignment of input terminal
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189
Start signal selection
Pr. 250
Logic selection of output stop signal (MRS)
Pr. 17
Selection of action conditions of the second function signal (RT)
Pr. 155
Terminal assignment of output terminal
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196
4
Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2 signal)
Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50
Detection of output current (Y12 signal)
Detection of zero current (Y13 signal)
Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166,
Pr. 167
Remote output function (REM signal)
Pr. 495 to Pr. 497
Pulse train output of output power (Y79 signal)
Pr. 799
Speed display and speed setting
Pr. 37, Pr. 144
Change of DU/PU monitor descriptions
Cumulative monitor clear
Pr. 52, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 563, Pr.
564, Pr. 891
Change of the monitor output from terminal FM and AM
Pr. 54 to Pr. 56, Pr. 158, Pr. 867
Adjustment of terminal FM and AM (calibration)
C0 (Pr. 900), C1 (Pr. 901)
Energy saving monitor
Pr. 891 to Pr. 899
Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2 signal)
Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50
Detection of output current (Y12 signal)
Detection of zero current (Y13 signal)
Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166,
Pr. 167
75
ADJUSTMENT
Purpose of Use
Parameter list
Purpose of Use
Operation selection at power
failure and instantaneous
power failure
Operation setting at fault
occurrence
Energy saving operation
Reduction of the motor noise
Measures against noise and
leakage currents
Frequency setting by analog
input
Misoperation prevention and
parameter setting restriction
Selection of operation mode
and operation location
Communication operation
and setting
Special operation and
frequency control
Useful functions
Setting from the parameter
unit and operation panel
76
Restart operation after instantaneous power failure/Flying
start
Parameter Number
Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165, Pr.
299, Pr. 611
Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous power failure Pr. 261 to Pr. 266
Retry function at fault occurrence
Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69
Output function of fault code
Pr. 76
Input/output phase loss protection selection
Pr. 251, Pr. 872
Regeneration avoidance function
Pr. 882 to Pr. 886
Energy saving control selection
Pr. 60
How much energy can be saved (energy saving monitor)
Pr. 891 to Pr. 899
Carrier frequency and SoftPWM selection
Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260
Noise elimination at the analog input
Pr. 74
Reduce mechanical resonance (speed smoothing control)
Pr. 653, Pr. 654
Analog input selection
Pr. 73, Pr. 267
Override function
Pr. 73, Pr. 252, Pr. 253
Noise elimination at the analog input
Pr. 74
Change of analog input frequency,
adjustment of voltage, current input and frequency
(calibration)
Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241,
C2 to C7 (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905)
Compensation at the analog input
Pr. 242, Pr. 243
Reset selection, disconnected PU detection
Pr. 75
Prevention of parameter rewrite
Pr. 77
Prevention of reverse rotation of the motor
Pr. 78
Displays necessary parameters only. (user group)
Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174
Control of parameter write by communication
Pr. 342
Operation mode selection
Pr. 79
Operation mode when power is on
Pr. 79, Pr. 340
Operation command source and speed command source
during communication operation
Pr. 338, Pr. 339
Selection of the NET mode operation control source
Pr. 550
Selection of the PU mode operation control source
Pr. 551
PU connector communication
Pr. 117 to Pr. 124,
Pr. 331 to Pr. 337, Pr. 341, Pr. 539
Control of parameter write by communication
Pr. 342
ModbusRTU communication specifications
Pr. 343
Operation command source and speed command source
during communication operation
Pr. 338, Pr. 339
Selection of the NET mode operation control source
Pr. 550
ModbusRTU protocol (communication protocol selection)
Pr. 549
PID control
Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 553, Pr. 554, Pr.
575 to Pr. 577, C42 (Pr. 934) to C45 (Pr.
935)
Switch between the inverter operation and commercial
power-supply operation to use
Pr. 135 to Pr. 139, Pr. 159
Free parameter
Pr. 888, Pr. 889
Increase cooling fan life
Pr. 244
To determine the maintenance time of parts.
Pr. 255 to Pr. 259, Pr. 503, Pr. 504
How much energy can be saved (energy saving monitor)
Pr. 60, Pr. 891 to Pr. 899
Parameter unit language switchover
Pr. 145
Operation selection of the operation panel
Pr. 161
Buzzer control of the operation panel
Pr. 990
Contrast adjustment of the parameter unit
Pr. 991
Parameter list
4.9.2
Display of the extended parameters
Operation
Display
1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
PU indication is lit.
2. Press
to choose
the PU operation mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
3. Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4. Turn
until
(Pr. 160)
appears.
5. Press
"
6. Turn
"
to read the currently set value.
" (initial value) appears.
to change it to the set value
".
7. Press
to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· By turning
, you can read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
After parameter setting is completed, press
once to show the alarm history and
press
twice to return to the monitor display. To change settings of other parameters,
perform the operation in above steps 3 to 7.
Error display?
If the operation panel does not have the write precedence
REMARKS
If the setting has not been changed, the value does not flicker and the next parameter number appears.
9999
(Initial Value)
0
1
Description
4
Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be displayed.
Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
ADJUSTMENT
Pr. 160
77
Parameter list
4.9.3
Parameter list
Related
parameters
Parameter
0

Maximum/minimum
frequency
46
3
Multi-speed setting operation
Incre Initial
ments Value
Range
Torque boost
0.1%
6/4/3/2/
1.5/1% 0 to 30%
*1
1
2
Second torque
boost
0.1%

Maximum
frequency

Minimum frequency 0.01Hz
Description
0.01Hz
9999
*1
Initial values differ according to the
inverter capacity. (0.75K / 1.5K to 3.7K /
5.5K, 7.5K / 11K to 37K / 45K, 55K / 75K
or more)
0 to 30%
Set the torque boost when the RT signal is
on.
9999
Without second torque boost
Set the upper limit of the output frequency.
120/
0 to 120Hz *2 The setting depends on the inverter
60Hz*2
{: enabled
× : disabled
0Hz
0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
Set when performing the operation at
120/
120Hz or more.
120 to 400Hz
60Hz*3
*3 The setting depends on the inverter
0.01Hz

Base frequency
0.01Hz
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
19
Base frequency
voltage
0.1V
9999
8888
95% of power supply voltage
9999
Same as power supply voltage
0 to 400Hz
Set the base frequency when the RT signal
is on.
9999
Second V/F is invalid
47
4

5

6

24
to
27
232
to
Second V/F (base
frequency)
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
Multi-speed setting
(4 speed to 7
speed)
Multi-speed setting
(8 speed to 15
speed)
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
capacity. (55K or less/75k or more)
High speed
18 maximum
frequency
239
78
Name
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Set the output voltage at 0Hz as %.
Base frequency, voltage
Manual torque boost
Function
 indicates simple mode parameters.
capacity. (55K or less/75k or more)
Set the frequency when the motor rated
torque is generated. (50Hz/60Hz)
0 to 1000V Set the base voltage.
0.01Hz
9999
0.01Hz
60Hz
0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RT signal is on.
{
{
{
0.01Hz
30Hz
0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RM signal is on.
{
{
{
0.01Hz
10Hz
0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RL signal is on.
{
{
{
0.01Hz
9999
{
{
{
0.01Hz
9999
{
{
{
0 to 400Hz,
Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can
9999
be set according to the combination of the
RH, RM, RL and REX signals.
0 to 400Hz, 9999: not selected
9999
DC injection brake
Incre Initial
ments Value
Range
Description

Acceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
5/15s *4
0 to 3600/
360s
*4
8

Deceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
10/30s 0 to 3600/
*5
360s
*5
Acceleration/
20 deceleration
0.01Hz
reference frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration time
increments
1
44
Second
acceleration/
deceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
5s
45
Second
deceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
9999
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
0.01/
0.1A *6
Rated
inverter
current
21
9

51
11
Second electronic
thermal O/L relay
0.01/
0.1A *7
DC injection brake
operation time
0.5s
DC injection brake
operation voltage
0.1%
13
Starting frequency
0.01Hz
571
9999
3Hz
0.1s
Holding time at a
start
Load pattern
selection
Initial values differ according to the inverter
capacity. (7.5K or less/11K or more)
Initial values differ according to the inverter
capacity. (7.5K or less/11K or more)
Set the frequency referenced as
acceleration/deceleration time. Set the
1 to 400Hz
frequency change time from stop to Pr. 20 for
acceleration/deceleration time.
Increments: 0.1s
Range: 0 to 3600s
1
Increments: 0.01s
Range: 0 to 360s
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the acceleration/deceleration time
when the RT signal is on.
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the deceleration time when the RT signal
is on.
9999
Acceleration time = deceleration time
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A
Set the rated motor current.
0.5Hz
*6
*6
*7
The setting depends on the inverter
capacity (55K or less/75k or more)
*7
The setting depends on the inverter
capacity (55K or less/75k or more)
Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid
0 to 120Hz
Set the operation frequency of the DC
injection brake.
9999
Operate when the output frequency
becomes less than or equal to
Pr.13 Starting frequency.
0
DC injection brake disabled
0.1 to 10s
Set the operation time of the DC injection
brake.
0
DC injection brake disabled
Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque).
0.1 to 30%
0 to 60Hz
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Valid when the RT signal is on.
Set the rated motor current.
9999
4/2/1%
*8
Increments and
setting range of
acceleration/
deceleration time
setting can be
changed.
0
0 to 500A/
0 to 3600A
{
Set the motor deceleration time.
0
DC injection brake
0.01Hz
operation frequency
12
14
60Hz
{: enabled
× : disabled
Set the motor acceleration time.
7
10
V/F pattern matching
Starting frequency
applications
Name
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
*8
Initial values differ according to the
inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/11K to
55K/75K or more)
Starting frequency can be set.
Set the holding time of Pr.13 Starting
0.0 to 10.0s
frequency.
0.1s
1
9999
9999
Holding function at a start is invalid
0
For constant-torque load
1
1
Parameter list
Related
parameters
Parameter
For reduced-torque load
79
4
ADJUSTMENT
Motor protection
from overheat
(electronic thermal
relay function)
Acceleration/deceleration time setting
Function
Parameter list
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
Logic selection
of output stop
signal (MRS)
Jog operation
15
—
Jog frequency
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
16
17
MRS input selection
18
19
20,21
Stall prevention operation
80
0.01Hz
0.1/
0.01s
1
5Hz
0.5s
Range
Description
0 to 400Hz Set the frequency for jog operation.
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the acceleration/deceleration time for
jog operation. Set the time taken to reach
the frequency set in Pr.20 Acceleration/
deceleration reference frequency for
acceleration/deceleration time. (Initial value
is 60Hz)
In addition, acceleration/deceleration time
can not be set separately.
0
Open input always
2
Normally closed input (NC contact input
specifications)
0
Stall prevention operation selection
becomes invalid.
0.1 to 150%
Set the current value at which stall
prevention operation is started.
9999
Analog variable
0 to 200%
The stall operation level can be reduced
when operating at a high speed above the
rated frequency.
0
{: enabled
× : disabled
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Refer to Pr.3.
Refer to Pr.7 and Pr.8.
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation
factor at double
speed
Second stall
48 prevention
operation current
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
Second stall
49 prevention
0.01Hz
operation frequency
Stall prevention
operation reduction 0.01Hz
starting frequency
Stall prevention
148
0.1%
level at 0V input
Stall prevention
149
0.1%
level at 10V input
66
Voltage reduction
selection during
154
stall prevention
operation
—
Incre Initial
ments Value
Refer to Pr.1 and Pr.2.
Stall prevention
operation level
22
23
Name
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
156
Stall prevention
operation selection
157
OL signal output
timer
24 to 27 Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
1
120%
9999
9999
Constant according to Pr. 22
0
Second stall prevention operation invalid
0.1 to 150%
The stall prevention operation level can be
set.
0
Second stall prevention operation invalid
0.01 to
400Hz
Set the frequency at which stall prevention
operation of Pr. 48 is started.
9999
Pr. 48 is valid when the RT signal is on.
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the stall
operation level is started to reduce.
120%
0 to 150%
150%
0 to 150%
120%
0Hz
Stall prevention operation level can be
changed by the analog signal input to
terminal 1.
With voltage
reduction
1
Without voltage
reduction
0 to 31,
100, 101
Pr. 156 allows you to select whether to use
stall prevention or not according to the
acceleration/deceleration status.
0 to 25s
Set the output start time of the OL signal
output when stall prevention is activated.
9999
Without the OL signal output
1
1
0
0.1s
0s
You can select
whether to use
output voltage
reduction during stall
prevention operation
or not.
0
Multi-speed input
compensation
selection
28
Acceleration/
deceleration pattern
selection
29
Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern and backlash measures
Name
140
141
142
143
Backlash
acceleration
stopping frequency
Backlash
acceleration
stopping time
Backlash
deceleration
stopping frequency
Backlash
deceleration
stopping time
Incre Initial
ments Value
Range
0
1
0
0
Linear acceleration/ deceleration
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
2
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
3
Backlash measures
6
Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration
1Hz
0 to 400Hz
0.1s
0.5s
0 to 360s
0.01Hz
1Hz
0 to 400Hz
0.1s
0.5s
0 to 360s
0
1
2
Selection of regeneration unit
10
Regenerative
function selection
1
0
30
11
20
21
70
Special regenerative
brake duty
0.1%
0%
0 to 10%
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
With compensation
1
0.01Hz
{: enabled
× : disabled
Without compensation
0
1
1
Description
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Parameter list
Related
parameters
Parameter
Set the stopping frequency and time for
backlash measures.
Valid when Pr.29="3"
Inverter without regenerative function,
brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU)
Brake unit (MT-BU5),
power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
Setting is available for the models with
75K or more.
High power factor converter (FR-HC,
MT-HC),
power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV)
Inverter without
regenerative
function,
brake unit (FR-BU2,
FR-BU, BU)
DC feeding mode 1
Brake unit (MT-BU5), (operated by DC
power regeneration feeding only)
converter (MT-RC)
Setting is available
for the models with
75K or higher.
4
Inverter without
regenerative
function,
brake unit (FR-BU2,
DC feeding mode 2
FR-BU, BU)
(operated by
Brake unit (MT-BU5),
switching between
power regeneration
AC and DC)
converter (MT-RC)
Setting is available
for the models with
75K or higher.
Set this parameter when a brake unit or
power regeneration converter is used.
Setting can be made for the 75K or
more.
ADJUSTMENT
Input compensation
of multi-speed and
remote setting
Function
Parameter list
{
{
{
81
Name
Incre Initial
ments Value
Range
Description
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
{: enabled
× : disabled
Frequency jump 1A 0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
{
{
{
32
Frequency jump 1B 0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
{
{
{
33
Frequency jump 2A 0.01Hz
9999
{
{
{
34
Frequency jump 2B 0.01Hz
9999
{
{
{
35
Frequency jump 3A 0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
{
{
{
36
Frequency jump 3B 0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
{
{
{
37
Speed display
{
{
{
{
{
{
41
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Avoid mechanical
resonance points
(frequency jump)
31
Speed display and
speed setting
Related
parameters
Parameter
Detection of output frequency
(SU, FU, FU2 signal)
Function
Parameter list
—
—
Speed setting
144
switchover
Change of DU/PU monitor descriptions
Cumulative monitor clear
1
Up-to-frequency
0.1%
sensitivity
Output frequency
0.01Hz
42
detection
Output frequency
0.01Hz
detection for
43
reverse rotation
Second output
50
0.01Hz
frequency detection
44, 45 Refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.
46
47
48, 49
50
51
0
4
0
Frequency display, setting
1 to 9998
Set the machine speed at 60Hz.
0, 2, 4, 6,
8, 10, 102,
104, 106,
108, 110
Set the number of motor poles when
displaying the motor speed.
10%
0 to 100% Set the level where the SU signal turns on.
6Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency where the FU signal
turns on.
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency where the FU signal
turns on in reverse rotation.
9999
Same as Pr.42 setting
30Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency where the FU2 signal
turns on.
{
{
{
0
0, 5, 6, 8 to
14, 17, 20, 23
to 25, 50 to
57, 100
Select the monitor to be displayed on the
operation panel and parameter unit.
The setting value of "9" is available only for
the 75K or more.
{
{
{
0
Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
10
Set the maximum value when monitoring
from communication to 0 to 9999kWh.
×
×
{
9999
Set the maximum value when monitoring
from communication to 0 to 65535kWh.
Set "0" to clear the operation time monitor.
Setting "9999" has no effect.
×
×
×
{
{
{
9999
Refer to Pr. 0.
Refer to Pr. 3.
Refer to Pr. 22 and Pr. 23.
Refer to Pr. 41 to Pr. 43.
Refer to Pr. 9.
DU/PU main display
data selection
52
Watt-hour meter
170
clear
1
1
9999
171
Operation hour
meter clear
1
9999
0, 9999
Monitor decimal
digits selection
0
Displays the monitor as integral value.
268
1
9999
1
Displays the monitor in increments of 0.1.
9999
No fixed decimal position
563
Energization time
carrying-over times
1
0
The numbers of cumulative energization time
0 to 65535 monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed.
Reading only
×
×
×
564
Operating time
carrying-over times
1
0
The numbers of operation time monitor
0 to 65535 exceeded 65535h is displayed.
Reading only
×
×
×
{
{
{
Cumulative power
891 monitor digit shifted
times
82
1
0 to 400Hz,
1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B is frequency
9999
jumps
0 to 400Hz,
9999: Function invalid
9999
1
0 to 4
Set the number of times to shift the
cumulative power monitor digit.
Clamps the monitor value at maximum.
9999
No shift
Clears the monitor value when it exceeds
the maximum value.
9999
Name
{
{
{
Frequency
monitoring
reference
0.01Hz
60Hz
Set the full-scale value to output the output
0 to 400Hz frequency monitor value to terminal FM and
AM.
{
{
{
Current monitoring
reference
0.01/
0.1A *9
{
{
{
56
AM terminal
function selection
867 AM output filter
Restart coasting
time
Restart cushion
time
Restart operation
after instantaneous
power failure
Automatic restart
after instantaneous
162
power failure
selection
First cushion time
163
for restart
First cushion
164
voltage for restart
Stall prevention
165 operation level for
restart
Rotation direction
299 detection selection
at restarting
611
{: enabled
× : disabled
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 Select the monitor output to terminal FM.
to 14, 17, 21, The setting value of "9" is available only for
24, 50, 52, 53 the 75K or more.
55
58
Description
1
FM terminal
function selection
57
Range
1
54
158
Incre Initial
ments Value
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Acceleration time at
a restart
Rated 0 to 500/
inverter 0 to 3600A
current *9
1
1
0.01s
0.01s
0.1s
1
0
The setting depends on the inverter
capacity (55K or less/75K or more)
Select the monitor output to terminal AM.
The setting value of "9" is available only for
the 75K or more.
{
{
{
0 to 5s
Set the output filter of terminal AM.
{
{
{
0
The coasting time is as follows:
1.5K or less................................... 0.5s,
2.2K to 7.5K .................................. 1.0s,
11K to 55K .................................... 3.0s,
75K or more .................................. 5.0s
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
9999
1s
*9
1 to 3, 5, 6,
8 to 14,
17, 21, 24,
50, 52, 53
0.1 to 5s/
0.1 to 30s
0.1s
Set the full-scale value to output the output
current monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered
restart after an instantaneous power failure.
*10
*10 The setting depends on the inverter
capacity (55K or less/75k or more)
9999
No restart
0 to 60s
Set a voltage starting time at restart.
0
With frequency search
1
Without frequency search (reduced voltage
system)
10
Frequency search at every start
11
Reduced voltage at every start
Set a voltage starting time at restart.
Consider according to the magnitude of
load (moment of inertia/torque).
0.1s
0s
0 to 20s
0.1%
0%
0 to 100%
0.1%
120%
0 to 150%
Consider the rated inverter current as
100% and set the stall prevention operation
level during restart operation.
0
Without rotation direction detection
1
With rotation direction detection
9999
When Pr. 78="0", the rotation direction is
detected.
When Pr. 78="1","2", the rotation direction is
not detected.
1
0.1s
9999
5/15s *11
Set the acceleration
time to reach the
Pr. 20 Acceleration/
0 to 3600s
*11 The setting
deceleration
depends on the
reference frequency at
inverter capacity
a restart.
9999
Acceleration time for
restart is the normal
acceleration time
(e.g. Pr. 7).
Parameter list
Related
parameters
Parameter
4
{
{
{
(55K or less/75k
or more)
83
ADJUSTMENT
Change of the monitor
output from terminal
FM and AM
Function
Parameter list
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
Name
Incre Initial
ments Value
Range
Remote setting function
0
Energy saving
control selection
Retry function at alarm occurrence
Use the constanttorque motor
(applied motor)
—
Carrier frequency
and SoftPWM
selection
Frequency setting
storage function
Multi-speed setting
⎯
Used
2
Not used
Remote setting
Remote function
selection
59
1
0
3
11
12
60

65
Energy saving
control selection
Retry selection
67
68
69
Number of retries at
fault occurrence
Retry waiting time
1
1
1
0.1s
Retry count display
1
erase
Refer to Pr.22 and Pr.23.
Remote setting
(These setting
values enable
deceleration to the
frequency lower than
the set frequency.)
No (Turning STF/
STR off clears
remotely-set
frequency.)
{: enabled
× : disabled
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Used
Not used
Not used (Turning
STF/STR OFF clears
remotely-set
frequency.)
0
Normal operation mode
4
Energy saving operation mode
9
Optimum excitation control mode
0 to 5
A fault for retry can be selected.
0
No retry function
1 to 10
Set the number of retries at fault
occurrence. A fault output is not provided
during retry operation.
101 to 110
Set the number of retries at fault
occurrence. (The setting value - 100 is the
number of retries.) A fault output is
provided during retry operation.
1s
0 to 10s
Set the waiting time from when an inverter
fault occurs until a retry is made.
{
{
{
0
0
Clear the number of restarts succeeded by
retry.
{
{
{
0
Thermal characteristics of a standard motor
1
Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi
constant-torque motor
2
Thermal characteristic of standard motor
Adjustable 5 points V/F
{
{
{
20
Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR 4P
1.5kW or less)
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
0
0
0
66
67 to 69 Refer to Pr.65.
Refer to Pr.30.
70
71
Applied motor
PWM frequency
selection
72
1
1
0
2
0 to 15/
0 to 6, 25
*12
PWM carrier frequency can be changed.
The setting displayed is in [kHz].
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz, 15
indicates 14.5kHz and 25 indicates
2.5kHz.
*12 The setting depends on the inverter
capacity (55K or less/75k or more)
240
Soft-PWM
operation selection
1
1
PWM frequency
260 automatic
1
0
Soft-PWM invalid
1
When Pr. 72="0 to 5" ("0 to 4" for the 75K or
more), Soft-PWM is valid.
0
PWM carrier frequency is constant
independently of load.
When the carrier frequency is set to 3kHz
or more (Pr. 72 ≥ 3), perform continuous
operation at less than 85% of the rated
inverter current.
1
switchover
1
84
RH, RM, RL signal
function
1
13
—
Description
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Decreases PWM carrier frequency
automatically when load increases.
Name
Analog input
selection
Range
{: enabled
× : disabled
0 to 7,
10 to 17
You can select the input specifications of
terminal 2 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA)
and input specifications of terminal 1 (0 to
±5V, 0 to ±10V).
To change the terminal 2 to the voltage
input specification (0 to 5V/ 0 to 10V), turn
OFF(initial status) the voltage/current input
switch 2. To change it to the current input(0
to 20mA), turn ON the voltage/current input
switch 2. Override and reversible operation
can be selected.
{
×
{
1
1
0.1%
100%
0 to 100%
Set the ratio of added compensation
amount when terminal 2 is the main speed.
{
{
{
0.1%
75%
0 to 100%
Set the ratio of added compensation
amount when terminal 4 is the main speed.
{
{
{
252 Override bias
0.1%
50%
0 to 200%
Set the bias side compensation value of
override function.
{
{
{
253 Override gain
0.1%
150%
0 to 200%
Set the gain side compensation value of
override function.
{
{
{
0
Terminal 4 input 4 to voltage/current
20mA
input switch 1 (initial
{
×
{
1
Terminal 4 input 0 to
Turn OFF the
5V
2
Terminal 4 input 0 to
input switch 1.
10V
0 to 8
The primary delay filter time constant for
the analog input can be set.
A larger setting results in slower response.
{
{
{
0 to 3,
14 to 17
You can select the reset input acceptance,
disconnected PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FRPU07) connector detection function and
PU stop function.
For the initial value, reset always enabled,
without disconnected PU detection, and
with PU stop function are set.
{
×
×
0
Without fault code output
1
With fault code output
{
{
{
4
2
Fault code output at fault occurrence only
0
Write is enabled only during a stop
1
Parameter write is disabled.
{
{
{
2
Parameter write is enabled in any operation
mode regardless of operating status.
0
Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
1
Reverse rotation disallowed
{
{
{
2
Forward rotation disallowed
Terminal 1 added
242 compensation
amount (terminal 2)
Terminal 1 added
243 compensation
amount (terminal 4)
Analog input selection
Description
ADJUSTMENT
73
Incre Initial
ments Value
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Parameter list
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
Turn ON the
267
Terminal 4 input
selection
1
status).
0
Prevention of
Prevention of
reverse rotation
parameter rewrite
of the motor
Output function
of fault code
Reset selection,
disconnected PU
detection
Noise elimination
at the analog input
voltage/current
74
75
76
77
78
Input filter time
constant
Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection
Fault code output
selection
Parameter write
selection
Reverse rotation
prevention selection
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
0
0
0
85
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
Operation mode selection
79

Name
Operation mode
selection
Incre Initial
ments Value
1
0
Range
0
External/PU switchover mode
1
Fixed to PU operation mode
2
Fixed to External operation mode
3
External/PU combined operation mode 1
4
External/PU combined operation mode 2
6
Switchover mode
7
External operation mode (PU operation
interlock)
0
As set in Pr.79.
1, 2
Started in the network operation mode.
When the setting is "2", it will resume the preinstantaneous power failure operation mode
after an instantaneous power failure occurs.
10, 12
Started in the network operation mode.
Operation mode can be changed between
the PU operation mode and network
operation mode from the operation panel.
When the setting is "12", it will resume the preinstantaneous power failure operation mode
after an instantaneous power failure occurs.
Communication
340 startup mode
1
0
selection
Motor
0.01kW/
capacity(Simple
0.1kW
magnetic flux vector
*13
control)
Simple magnetic
flux vector
control
80
90
Motor constant (R1)
0.001Ω/
0.01mΩ*
9999
9999
To select the Simple magnetic flux vector
0.4 to 55/
control, set the capacity of the motor used.
0 to 3600kW
*13
*13 The setting depends on the inverter
capacity (55K or less/75k or more)
9999
V/F control is performed
0 to 50Ω/
0 to 400mΩ
Used to set the motor primary resistance
value.
(Normally setting is not necessary.)
*14
9999
V/F1(first
frequency)
V/F1(first frequency
voltage)
V/F2(second
frequency)
V/F2(second
frequency voltage)
V/F3(third
frequency)
V/F3(third
frequency voltage)
V/F4(fourth
frequency)
V/F4(fourth
frequency voltage)
V/F5(fifth
frequency)
V/F5(fifth frequency
voltage)
100
101
Adjustable 5 points V/F
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
71
86
Refer to page 84.
Description
*14 The setting depends on the inverter
capacity (55K or less/75k or more)
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
{: enabled
× : disabled
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
×
{
Use the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SFHRCA) constants
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
{
{
{
0.1V
0V
0 to 1000V
{
{
{
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
{
{
{
0.1V
0V
0 to 1000V
{
{
{
0.01Hz
9999
{
{
{
0.1V
0V
{
{
{
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
{
{
{
0.1V
0V
0 to 1000V
{
{
{
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
{
{
{
0.1V
0V
0 to 1000V
{
{
{
0 to 400Hz,
Set each points (frequency, voltage) of
9999
V/F pattern.
0 to 1000V 9999: No V/F setting
PU communication
station number
118
PU communication
speed
120
121
122
123
124
PU communication
stop bit length
PU communication
parity check
Number of PU
communication
retries
PU communication
check time interval
Incre Initial
ments Value
1
1
1
1
1
0.1s
PU communication
waiting time setting
1
PU communication
CR/LF selection
1
0
192
1
2
9999
9999
1
1
PU mode operation
551 command source
selection
1
{: enabled
× : disabled
Specify the inverter station number.
Set the inverter station numbers when two
or more inverters are connected to one
personal computer.
{
{
{
48, 96,
192, 384
Set the communication speed.
The setting value × 100 equals the
communication speed.
For example, the communication speed is
19200bps when the setting value is "192".
{
{
{
Stop bit length
data length
0
1bit
8bit
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
1
2bit
8bit
10
1bit
7bit
7bit
11
2bit
0
Without parity check
1
With odd parity check
2
With even parity check
0 to 10
Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error.
If the number of consecutive errors
exceeds the permissible value, the inverter
will come to trip.
9999
If a communication error occurs, the
inverter will not come to trip.
0
No PU connector communication
0.1 to 999.8s
Set the communication check time interval.
If a no-communication state persists for
longer than the permissible time, the
inverter will come to trip.
9999
No communication check
0 to 150ms
Set the waiting time between data
transmission to the inverter and response.
9999
Set with communication data.
0
Without CR/LF
1
With CR
2
With CR/LF
0
Parameter values written by communication
are written to the EEPROM and RAM.
1
Parameter values written by
communication are written to the RAM.
1
Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU
operation mode control source.
2
Select the PU connector as the PU
operation mode control source.
0
selection
Description
0 to 31
1
Communication
342 EEPROM write
Range
2
4
ADJUSTMENT
117
119
PU connector communication
Name
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Parameter list
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
87
Change of analog input frequency,
adjustment of voltage, current input and frequency (calibration)
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
125

126

241
C2
(902)
C3
(902)
C4
(903)
C5
(904)
C6
(904)
C7
(905)
Name
Terminal 2
frequency setting
gain frequency
Terminal 4
frequency setting
gain frequency
Analog input display
unit switchover
Terminal 2
frequency setting
bias frequency
Terminal 2
frequency setting
bias
Terminal 2
frequency setting
gain
Terminal 4
frequency setting
bias frequency
Terminal 4
frequency setting
bias
Terminal 4
frequency setting
gain
Incre Initial
ments Value
Range
Description
{: enabled
× : disabled
0.01Hz
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency of terminal 2 input gain
(maximum).
{
×
{
0.01Hz
60Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency of terminal 4 input gain
(maximum).
{
×
{
1
0
{
{
{
0.01Hz
0
Displayed in %
1
Displayed in V/mA
0Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency on the bias side of
terminal 2 input.
{
×
{
0.1%
0%
0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the bias side
voltage (current) of terminal 2 input.
{
×
{
0.1%
100%
0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the gain side
voltage of terminal 2 input.
{
×
{
0.01Hz
0Hz
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency on the bias side of
terminal 4 input.
{
×
{
0.1%
20%
0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the bias side current
(voltage) of terminal 4 input.
{
×
{
0.1%
100%
0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the gain side
current (voltage) of terminal 4 input.
{
×
{
Select the unit for
analog input display.
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
88
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
PID control
128
129
PID control
automatic
switchover
frequency
PID action selection
PID proportional
band
Incre Initial
ments Value
0.01Hz
1
0.1%
Range
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the control is
automatically changed to PID control.
9999
Without PID automatic switchover function
10, 110
PID reverse action
11, 111
PID forward action
20, 120
PID reverse action
21, 121
PID forward action
50
PID reverse action
Deviation value
signal input
51
PID forward action
(LONWORKS, CC-Link
communication)
60
PID reverse action
Measured value, set
value input
61
PID forward action
(LONWORKS, CC-Link
communication)
9999
10
100%
PID integral time
0.1s
1s
131
PID upper limit
0.1%
9999
132
PID lower limit
0.1%
9999
133
PID action set point 0.01%
9999
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
No function
No function
0 to 100% Used to set the set point for PID control.
9999
{
No integral control.
Set the lower limit value.
If the measured value falls below the
setting range, the FDN signal is output.
0 to 100%
The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the
measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent
to 100%.
9999
{
No proportional control
Set the upper limit value.
If the feedback value exceeds the setting,
0 to 100% the FUP signal is output. The maximum
input (20mA/5V/10V) of the measured
value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999
{
Measured value
input (terminal 4)
Set value (terminal 2
or Pr. 133)
When deviation step is input, time (Ti) is the
time required for integral (I) action to
provide the same manipulated variable as
0.1 to 3600s
the proportional (P) action. As the integral
time decreases, the set point is reached
earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
9999
{: enabled
× : disabled
Deviation value
signal (terminal 1)
If the proportional band is narrow
(parameter setting is small), the
manipulated variable varies greatly with a
slight change of the measured value.
0.1 to 1000% Hence, as the proportional band narrows,
the response sensitivity (gain) improves but
the stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting
occurs.
Gain K = 1/proportional band
9999
130
Description
Terminal 2 input voltage is the set point.
89
4
ADJUSTMENT
127
Name
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Parameter list
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
134
Name
PID differential time
553 PID deviation limit
PID control
PID signal
554
operation selection
575
Output interruption
detection time
Output interruption
576
detection level
Output interruption
577
cancel level
Incre Initial
ments Value
0.01s
0.1%
1
0.1s
0.01Hz
0.1%
9999
9999
0
1s
0Hz
Range
0.01 to
10.00s
For deviation lamp input, time (Td) required
for providing only the manipulated variable
for the proportional (P) action. As the
differential time increases, greater
response is made to a deviation change.
9999
No differential control.
0.01
C43 PID display bias
(934) analog value
0.1%
20%
C44 PID display gain
(935) coefficient
0.01
9999
C45 PID display gain
(935) analog value
0.1%
9999
100%
9999
No function
0 to 3,
10 to 13
Select the operation to be performed at the
detection of upper, lower, and deviation
limit for the measured value input. The
operation for PID output suspension
function can be selected.
If the output frequency after PID operation
remains lower than the Pr. 576 setting for
0 to 3600s
longer than the time set in Pr. 575, the
inverter stops operation.
{
{
{
{
{
{
9999
Without output interruption function
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the output
interruption processing is performed.
{
{
{
Set the level (Pr.577 - 1000%) to release the
PID output interruption function.
{
{
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
0 to 500.00
Set the coefficient on bias side (minimum)
of terminal 4 input.
9999
Displayed in %.
Set the converted % on bias side
0 to 300.0% (minimum) current /voltage of terminal 4
input.
0 to 500.00
Set the coefficient on gain side (maximum)
of the terminal 4 input.
9999
Displayed in %.
Set the converted % on gain side
0 to 300.0% (maximum) of current/voltage of terminal 4
input.
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
90
{: enabled
× : disabled
Y48 signal is output when the absolute
0 to 100.0% value of deviation amount exceeds the
deviation limit value.
1000% 900 to 1100%
C42 PID display bias
(934) coefficient
Description
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
135
136
Parameter unit
language switchover
—
—
138
139
Electronic bypass
sequence selection
MC switchover
interlock time
Start waiting time
Incre Initial
ments Value
Automatic
switchover
frequency from
inverter to bypass
operation
Automatic
switchover
159 frequency range
from bypass to
inverter operation
Without electronic bypass sequence
1
With electronic bypass sequence
1s
0 to 100s
0.5s
0
0.1s
0.1s
1
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
Description
0
1
Bypass selection at
a fault
Range
{: enabled
× : disabled
{
{
{
Set the operation interlock time of MC2 and
MC3.
{
{
{
0 to 100s
Set the time slightly longer (0.3 to 0.5s or
so) than the time from when the ON signal
enters MC3 until it actually turns on.
{
{
{
0
Inverter output is stopped (motor coast) at
inverter fault.
{
{
{
1
Operation is automatically switched to
bypass operation at inverter fault (Not
switched when an external thermal relay
operation (E.OHT) or CPU fault (E.CPU)
occurs)
0 to 60Hz
Set the frequency to switch inverter
operation to bypass operation.
{
{
{
9999
Without automatic switchover
0 to 10Hz
Valid during automatic switchover operation
(Pr.139 ≠ 9999)
When the frequency command decreases
below (Pr.139 - Pr.159) after operation is
switched from inverter operation to bypass
operation, the inverter automatically
switches operation to inverter operation
and operates at the frequency of frequency
command.
When the inverter start command (STF/
STR) is turned off, operation is switched to
inverter operation also.
{
{
{
0
9999
9999
9999
Valid during automatic switchover operation
(Pr.139 ≠ 9999)
When the inverter start command (STF/
STR) is turned off after operation is
switched from inverter operation to bypass
operation, operation is switched to inverter
operation and the motor decelerates to
stop.
0
Japanese
1
English
2
Germany
3
French
4
Spanish
5
Italian
6
Swedish
7
Finnish
140 to 143 Refer to Pr.29.
Refer to Pr.37.
144
145
PU display
language selection
1
0
4
{
×
×
ADJUSTMENT
Switch between the inverter operation and bypass operation to use
137
Name
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Parameter list
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
148,149 Refer to Pr.22 and Pr.23.
91
Detection of output current (Y12 signal)
Detection of zero current (Y13 signal)
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
Name
Incre Initial
ments Value
150
Output current
detection level
151
Output current
detection signal
delay time
0.1s
152
Zero current
detection level
0.1%
153
Zero current
detection time
Output current
166 detection signal
retention time
0.1%
0.01s
0.1s
Set the output current detection level.
100% is the rated inverter current.
{
{
{
0s
0 to 10s
Set the output current detection period.
Set the time from when the output current
has risen above the setting until the output
current detection signal (Y12) is output.
{
{
{
5%
Set the zero current detection level.
0 to 150% Suppose that the rated inverter current is
100%.
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
×
×
0.5s
Selection of action
conditions of the
second function
154
Set the retention time when the Y12 signal
is on.
9999
The Y12 signal on status is retained.
The signal is turned off at the next start.
0
Y13 Signal - ON
Operation continued Operation continued
1
Fault stop (E.CDO)
10
Operation continued Fault stop (E.CDO)
Operation continued
11
Fault stop (E.CDO)
0
Second function is immediately valid with
on of the RT signal.
10
Second function is valid only during the RT
signal is on and constant speed operation.
(Invalid during acceleration/deceleration)
9999
Only the simple mode parameters can be
displayed.
1
Only the parameters registered in the user
group can be displayed.
0
Simple mode and extended mode
parameters can be displayed.
(0 to 16)
Displays the number of cases registered as
a user group (reading only).
9999
Batch clear the user group registration
Fault stop (E.CDO)
Refer to Pr.22 and Pr.23.
RT signal function
validity condition
selection
155
1
0
156, 157 Refer to Pr.22 and Pr.23.
Refer to Pr.54 to Pr.56.
158
Refer to Pr.135 to Pr.139.
159
Display of applied
parameters and user
group function
160
Operation selection
of the operation panel
0 to 10s
0.1s
selection
92
0 to 10s
Set this parameter to define the period from
when the output current drops below the
Pr.152 value until the zero current detection
signal (Y13) is output.
0
1
{: enabled
× : disabled
0 to 150%
120%
Output current
—
Description
Y12 Signal - ON
167 detection operation
—
Range
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear

User group read
selection
1
9999
User group
172 registered display/
1
0
batch clear
User group
registration
1
9999
0 to 999,
9999
Set the parameter numbers to be
registered to the user group.
Read value is always "9999".
{
×
×
174 User group clear
1
9999
0 to 999,
9999
Set the parameter numbers to be cleared
from the user group.
Read value is always "9999".
{
×
×
0
Setting dial frequency
setting mode
1
Setting dial
potentiometer mode
Setting dial frequency
setting mode
{
×
{
10
11
Setting dial
potentiometer mode
173
161
Frequency setting/
key lock operation
selection
1
0
Key lock invalid
Key lock valid
178
Function assignment of input terminal
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
Incre Initial
ments Value
Range
Description
{: enabled
× : disabled
Refer to Pr.57 and Pr.58.
Refer to Pr.150 to Pr.153.
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Parameter list
162 to 165
166, 167
168, 169
170, 171
172 to 174
Name
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Refer to Pr.52.
Refer to Pr.160.
STF terminal
function selection
STR terminal
function selection
RL terminal function
selection
RM terminal
function selection
RH terminal
function selection
RT terminal function
selection
AU terminal
function selection
JOG terminal
function selection
CS terminal
function selection
MRS terminal
function selection
STOP terminal
function selection
RES terminal
function selection
60
0 to 8, 10 to
12, 14, 16,
24, 25, 60,
62, 64 to 67,
70 to 72,
9999
1
61
0 to 8, 10 to
12, 14, 16,
24, 25, 61,
62, 64 to 67,
70 to 72,
9999
1
0
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
24
1
25
1
62
0 to 8,
10 to 12, 14,
16, 24, 25,
62, 64 to 67,
70 to 72,
9999
0 to 8,
10 to 12, 14,
16, 24, 25,
62 to 67, 70
to 72, 9999
0 to 8,
10 to 12, 14,
16, 24, 25,
62, 64 to 67,
70 to 72,
9999
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Low-speed operation command (RL)
Middle-speed operation command (RM)
High-speed operation command (RH)
Second function selection (RT)
Terminal 4 input selection (AU)
Jog operation selection (JOG)
Selection of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure (CS)
7: External thermal relay input (OH)
8: Fifteen speed selection (REX)
10: Inverter operation enable signal (FRHC, MT-HC, FR-CV connection) (X10)
11: FR-HC, MT-HC connection,
instantaneous power failure detection
(X11)
12: PU operation external interlock (X12)
14: PID control valid terminal (X14)
16: PU-external operation switchover (X16)
24: Output stop (MRS)
25: Start self-holding selection (STOP)
60: Forward rotation command (STF)
(assigned to STF terminal (Pr.178) only)
61: Reverse rotation command (STR)
(assigned to STR terminal (Pr.179) only)
62: Inverter reset (RES)
63: PTC thermistor input (PTC) (assigned
to AU terminal (Pr.184) only)
64: PID forward/reverse action switchover
(X64)
65: PU-NET operation switchover (X65)
66: External-NET operation switchover
(X66)
67: Command source switchover (X67)
70: DC feeding operation permission (X70)
71: DC feeding cancel (X71)
72: PID integral value reset (X72)
9999: No function
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
4
ADJUSTMENT
—
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
93
Terminal assignment of output terminal
—
94
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
Name
Incre Initial
ments Value
190
RUN terminal
function selection
1
0
191
SU terminal
function selection
1
1
192
IPF terminal
function selection
1
2
193
OL terminal function
selection
1
3
194
FU terminal function
selection
1
4
195
ABC1 terminal
function selection
1
99
196
ABC2 terminal
function selection
1
9999
232 to 239
240
241
242, 243
Refer to Pr.4 to Pr.6.
Refer to Pr.72.
Refer to Pr.125 and Pr.126.
Refer to Pr.73.
Range
0 to 5, 7, 8,
10 to 19, 25,
26, 45 to 48,
64, 70, 79,
85, 90 to 96,
98, 99,
100 to 105,
107, 108,
110 to 116,
125, 126,
145 to 148,
164, 170,
179, 185,
190 to 196,
198, 199,
9999
0 to 5, 7, 8,
10 to 19, 25,
26, 45 to 48,
64, 70, 79,
85, 90, 91,
94 to 96, 98,
99,
100 to 105,
107, 108,
110 to 116,
125, 126,
145 to 148,
164, 170,
179, 185,
190, 191,
194 to 196,
198, 199,
9999
Description
0, 100: Inverter running (RUN)
1, 101: Up to frequency (SU)
2, 102: Instantaneous power failure/
undervoltage (IPF)
3, 103: Overload warning (OL)
4, 104: Output frequency detection (FU)
5, 105: Second output frequency detection
(FU2)
7, 107: Regenerative brake prealarm
(RBP) (Only for the 75K or more)
8, 108: Electronic thermal relay function
prealarm (THP)
10, 110: PU operation mode (PU)
11, 111: Inverter operation ready (RY)
12, 112: Output current detection (Y12)
13, 113: Zero current detection (Y13)
14, 114: PID lower limit (FDN)
15, 115: PID upper limit (FUP)
16, 116: PID forward/reverse rotation
output (RL)
17, —: Bypass operation switchover MC1
(MC1)
18, —: Bypass operation switchover MC2
(MC2)
19, —: Bypass operation switchover MC3
(MC3)
25, 125: Fan fault output (FAN)
26, 126: Heatsink overheat pre-alarm (FIN)
45, 145: Inverter running and start
command is on (RUN3)
46, 146: During deceleration at occurrence
of power failure (retained until
release) (Y46)
47, 147: During PID control activated (PID)
48, 148: PID deviation limit (Y48)
64, 164: During retry (Y64)
70, 170: PID output interruption (SLEEP)
79, 179: Pulse train output of output power
(Y79)
85, 185: DC current feeding (Y85)
90, 190: Life alarm (Y90)
91, 191: Fault output 3 (power-off signal)
(Y91)
92, 192: Energy saving average value
updated timing (Y92)
93, 193: Current average monitor signal
(Y93)
94, 194: Fault output 2 (ALM2)
95, 195: Maintenance timer signal (Y95)
96, 196: Remote output (REM)
98, 198: Alarm output (LF)
99, 199: Fault output (ALM)
9999: No function
0 to 99: Positive logic, 100 to 199: Negative
logic
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
{: enabled
× : disabled
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
×
{
Cooling fan
operation selection
244
245
Slip compensation
Name
Rated slip
246
Slip compensation
time constant
247
Constant-power
range slip
compensation
selection
Incre Initial
ments Value
1
0.01%
0.01s
1
Range
0
Operates at power on
Cooling fan on/off control invalid (The
cooling fan is always on at power on)
1
Cooling fan on/off control valid
The fan is normally on during inverter
operation. The fan switches on/off
according to the temperature during a stop
of the inverter whose status is monitored.
1
9999
0.5s
0 to 50%
Used to set the rated motor slip.
9999
No slip compensation
Used to set the response time of slip
compensation. When the value is made
smaller, response will be faster. However,
0.01 to 10s
as load inertia is greater, a regenerative
overvoltage (E.OV†) error is more liable to
occur.
0
Slip compensation is not made in the
constant power range (frequency range
above the frequency set in Pr.3)
9999
Slip compensation is made in the constant
power range.
9999
Selection of motor
stopping method
0 to 100s
1000 to
1100s
250
Stop selection
0.1s
9999
9999
Input/output phase
failure protection
selection
8888
—
251
872
0
Output phase loss
protection selection
1
Input phase loss
protection selection
1
Description
STF signal:
Forward rotation
start
STR signal:
Reverse rotation
start
STF signal: Start
signal
STR signal:
Forward/reverse
signal
STF signal:
Forward rotation
start
STR signal:
When the start signal Reverse rotation
is turned off, the
start
motor decelerates to
STF signal: Start
stop.
signal
STR signal:
Forward/reverse
signal
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
{: enabled
× : disabled
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Parameter list
Related
parameters
Parameter
The motor is coasted
to a stop when the
preset time elapses
after the start signal
is turned off.
When 1000s to
1100s is set (Pr. 250
setting-1000)s later,
the motor coasts to
stop.
Without output phase loss protection
1
1
With output phase loss protection
0
Without input phase loss protection
1
With input phase loss protection
0
252, 253 Refer to Pr.73.
95
4
ADJUSTMENT
Increase cooling
fan life
Function
Parameter list
Display of the life of the inverter parts
—
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
255
256
257
Name
Life alarm status
display
Inrush current limit
circuit life display
Control circuit
capacitor life display
258
Main circuit
capacitor life display
259
Main circuit
capacitor life
measuring
260
Refer to Pr.72.
Incre Initial
ments Value
Range
Deceler
ate the
motor to
a stop at
instanta
neous
power
failure
262
263
Power failure stop
selection
Subtracted
frequency at
deceleration start
(0 to 15)
×
×
×
0
1%
100%
(0 to 100%)
Displays the deterioration degree of the
inrush current limit circuit. Reading only
×
×
×
1%
100%
(0 to 100%)
Displays the deterioration degree of the
control circuit capacitor. Reading only
×
×
×
1%
100%
Displays the deterioration degree of the
(0 to 100%) main circuit capacitor. Reading only
The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.
×
×
×
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
1
0
1
0.01Hz
Subtraction starting
0.01Hz
frequency
0
3Hz
60Hz
264
Power-failure
deceleration time 1
0.1/
0.01s
5s
265
Power-failure
deceleration time 2
0.1/
0.01s
9999
—
96
267
268
269
299
Power failure
0.01Hz
deceleration time
switchover frequency
0, 1
60Hz
Start measuring the main circuit capacitor life.
Switch the power supply on again and
check the Pr. 259 setting. Measurement is
complete if the setting is "3". Set the
deterioration degree in Pr.258.
At power
Operation at
restoration
undervoltage
Deceleration
during power
or power
time to a stop
failure
failure
deceleration
Coasts to a stop Coasts to a stop -
1
Decelerates
to a stop
Depends on
Decelerates to
Pr. 262 to Pr.
a stop
266 settings
2
Decelerates
to a stop
Accelerates
again
21
Decelerates
to a stop
Automatically
Decelerates to adjusts the
deceleration
a stop
time
22
Decelerates
to a stop
Accelerates
again
0 to 20Hz
Normally operation can be performed with the
initial value unchanged. But adjust the
frequency according to the magnitude of the
load specifications (moment of inertia, torque).
Depends on
Pr. 262 to Pr.
266 settings
Automatically
adjusts the
deceleration
time
When output frequency ≥ Pr.263
Decelerate from the speed obtained from
0 to 120Hz
(output frequency - Pr.262).
When output frequency < Pr.263
Decelerate from output frequency
Decelerate from the speed obtained from
(output frequency - Pr.262).
0 to 3600/ Set a deceleration slope down to the
360s
frequency set in Pr.266.
0 to 3600/
360s
Set a deceleration slope below the
frequency set in Pr.266.
9999
Same slope as in Pr.264
Set the frequency at which the deceleration
0 to 400Hz slope is switched from the Pr.264 setting to
the Pr.265 setting.
Refer to Pr.73.
Refer to Pr.52.
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Refer to Pr.57, Pr. 58.
{: enabled
× : disabled
1
9999
266
Description
Displays whether the control circuit capacitor,
main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each
parts of the inrush current limit circuit has
reached the life alarm output level or not.
0
261
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
332
333
334
RS-485 communication
335
RS-485
communication
station number
RS-485
communication
speed
RS-485 communication
stop bit length
RS-485 communication
parity check selection
RS-485 communication
retry count
Incre Initial
ments Value
0 to 31
(0 to 247)
Set the inverter station number.
(same specifications as Pr.117 ) When "1"
(Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr.551, the
setting range within parenthesis is applied.
{
{
{
1
96
3, 6, 12, 24,
48, 96, 192,
384
Used to select the communication speed.
(same specifications as Pr.118)
{
{
{
1
1
0, 1, 10, 11
Select stop bit length and data length.
(same specifications as Pr.119)
{
{
{
1
2
0, 1, 2
Select the parity check specifications.
(same specifications as Pr.120)
{
{
{
1
1
0 to 10,
9999
Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error. (same
specifications as Pr.121)
{
{
{
0
RS-485 communication can be made, but
the inverter will come to trip in the NET
operation mode.
0.1 to
999.8s
Set the communication check time interval.
(same specifications as Pr.122)
{
{
{
9999
No communication check
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
×
×
×
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
337
RS-485 communication
waiting time setting
1
9999
338
Communication
operation command
source
1
0
0.1s
1
0s
RS-485 communication
CR/LF selection
1
1
342
Communication
EEPROM write
selection
1
0
343
1
0
Modbus-RTU
539 communication
0.1s
9999
check time interval
549 Protocol selection
NET mode
550 operation command
source selection
PU mode operation
551 command source
selection
1
1
1
0 to 150ms, Set the waiting time between data
transmission to the inverter and response.
9999
(same specifications as Pr.123)
0
Operation command source
communication
1
Operation command source external
0
Speed command source communication
1
Speed command source external (Frequency
setting from communication is invalid,
terminal 2 and 1 setting from external is valid)
2
Speed command source external (Frequency
setting from communication is valid, terminal
2 and 1 setting from external is invalid)
0, 1, 2
Select presence/absence of CR/LF. (same
specifications as Pr.124)
0
Parameter values written by communication
are written to the EEPROM and RAM.
1
Parameter values written by
communication are written to the RAM.
0
341
Communication
error count
{: enabled
× : disabled
0
RS-485
communication
check time interval
339
Description
1
336
Communication
speed command
source
Range
Displays the number of communication
errors during Modbus-RTU communication.
(read only) Read only.
Displayed only when Modbus-RTU protocol
is selected.
0
Modbus-RTU communication can be made,
but the inverter will come to trip in the NET
operation mode.
0.1 to
999.8s
Set the interval of communication check time.
(same specifications as Pr. 122)
9999
No communication check (signal loss
detection) is made)
0
Mitsubishi inverter
(computer link)
protocol
1
Modbus-RTU
protocol
0
Communication option valid
1
Inverter RS-485 terminal valid
9999
Automatic recognition of the
communication option
Normally, the RS-485 terminals are valid.
Communication option is valid when the
communication option is mounted.
1
Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU
operation mode control source.
2
Select the PU connector as the PU
operation mode control source.
0
9999
2
After setting change,
reset (switch power off,
then on) the inverter.
The setting change is
reflected after a reset.
97
Parameter list
331
Name
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
4
ADJUSTMENT
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
—
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
340
Name
Incre Initial
ments Value
Range
Remote output data
clear at powering off Remote output data
Remote output data clear at inverter reset
held at powering off
Remote output
function
(REM signal)
Output
stop
Maintenance of parts
497
—
Current average value
monitor signal
—
—
—
1
0
Remote output data
clear at powering off Remote output data
Remote output data held at inverter reset
held at powering off
10
Remote output data
1
Remote output data
2
503
Maintenance timer
504
Maintenance timer
alarm output set
time
522
Output stop
frequency
1
0
0 to 4095
{
{
{
×
×
×
Output terminal can be switched on and off.
1
1
1
0.01Hz
0
0 to 4095
×
×
×
0
Displays the cumulative energization time
of the inverter in 100h increments.
0 (1 to 9998) Reading only
Writing the setting of "0" clears the
cumulative energization time.
×
×
×
{
×
{
{
{
{
9999
9999
0 to 9998
Set the time taken until when the
maintenance timer alarm output signal
(Y95) is output.
9999
No function
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency to start coasting to a
stop (output shutoff).
9999
No function
539,
Refer to Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343.
549, 550
Refer to Pr.117 to Pr.124, Pr.331 to Pr.339, Pr.341 to Pr.343.
551
553, 554 Refer to Pr.127 to Pr.134.
555
556
557
563, 564
571
575 to 577
611
Current average
time
Data output mask
time
Current average
value monitor signal
output reference
current
0.1s
1s
0.1 to 1.0s
Set the time taken to average the current
during start bit output (1s).
{
{
{
0.1s
0s
0.0 to 20.0s
Set the time for not obtaining (mask)
transient state data.
{
{
{
{
{
{
0.01/
0.1A
*15
Rated 0 to 500/
inverter 0 to 3600A
current *15
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the
signal of the current average value.
*15 Setting increments and setting range
differ according to the inverter capacity.
(55K or less/75K or more)
Refer to Pr.52.
Refer to Pr.13.
Refer to Pr.127 to Pr.134.
Refer to Pr.57 and Pr.58.
Speed smoothing
control
0.1%
0
0 to 200%
The torque fluctuation is reduced to
reduce vibration due to mechanical
resonance.
{
{
{
654
Speed smoothing
cutoff frequency
0.01Hz
20Hz
0 to 120Hz
Set the minimum value for the torque
variation cycle (frequency).
{
{
{
799
Pulse increment
setting for output
power
1kWh
0.1kWh,
1kWh,
10kWh,
100kWh,
1000kWh
Pulse train output of output power (Y79)
is output in pulses at every output
current (kWh) that is specified.
{
{
{
—
867
872
Reduce
mechanical
resonance
653
Pulse train
output of
output power
—
1
Remote output
selection
11
496
{: enabled
× : disabled
Refer to Pr.79.
0
495
Description
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
98
0.1kWh
Refer to Pr.54 to Pr.56.
Refer to Pr.251.
883
Regeneration
avoidance
operation selection
Regeneration
avoidance
operation level
Incre Initial
ments Value
1
0.1V
0
Range
Description
0
Regeneration avoidance function invalid
1
Regeneration avoidance function is always
valid
2
Regeneration avoidance function is valid
only during a constant speed operation
Set the bus voltage level at which
regeneration avoidance operates. When
the bus voltage level is set to low,
DC380V
overvoltage error will be less apt to
300 to 800V
occur. However, the actual deceleration
/760V*
time increases.
{: enabled
× : disabled
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
×
×
{
×
×
* The initial value differs according to the
voltage level. (200V class / 400V class)
884
885
Regeneration
avoidance at
1
deceleration
detection sensitivity
Regeneration
avoidance
0.01Hz
compensation
frequency limit
value
0
0 to 5
Set sensitivity to detect the bus voltage
change.
1 (Low) → 5 (High)
0 to 10Hz
Set the limit value of frequency which rises
at activation of regeneration avoidance
function.
9999
Frequency limit invalid
6Hz
886
Regeneration
avoidance voltage
gain
0.1%
100%
Adjust responsiveness at activation of
regeneration avoidance.
A larger setting will improve
0 to 200%
responsiveness to the bus voltage change.
However, the output frequency could
become unstable.
888
Free parameter 1
1
9999
0 to 9999
889
Free parameter 2
1
9999
0 to 9999
Parameters you can use for your own
purposes.
Used for maintenance, management, etc.
by setting a unique number to each inverter
when multiple inverters are used.
4
ADJUSTMENT
Free
parameter
Regeneration avoidance function
882
Name
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Parameter list
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
99
Parameter
Related
parameters
Function
Parameter list
891
0.1%
893
Energy saving
monitor reference
(motor capacity)
0.01/
0.1kW
Energy saving monitor
895
896
Adjustment of
terminal FM
and AM
(calibration)
898
Buzzer control
of the operation
panel
—
Range
Description
Control selection
during commercial
power-supply
operation
Power saving rate
reference value
Power unit cost
Power saving
monitor average
time
Power saving
cumulative monitor
clear
*16
100%
Set the load factor for commercial powersupply operation.
30 to 150% This value is used to calculate the power
consumption estimated value during
commercial power supply operation.
Set the motor capacity (pump capacity).
Inverter 0.1 to 55/
Set when calculating power saving rate and
rated 0 to 3600kW average power saving rate value.
*16 The setting depends on the inverter
capacity *16
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
capacity (55K or less/75k or more)
0
1
1
0.01
1h
0
9999
9999
9999
1
Inlet damper control (fan)
2
Valve control (pump)
3
Commercial power-supply drive (fixed value)
0
Consider the value during commercial
power-supply operation as 100%
1
Consider the Pr.893 setting as 100%.
9999
No function
0 to 500
Set the power unit cost. Displays the power
saving rate on the energy saving monitor
9999
No function
0
Average for 30 minutes
1 to 1000h Average for the set time
9999
1
9999
Discharge damper control (fan)
No function
0
Cumulative monitor value clear
1
Cumulative monitor value hold
10
Cumulative monitor continue
(communication data upper limit 9999)
9999
Cumulative monitor continue
(communication data upper limit 65535)
0 to 100%
Use for calculation of annual power saving
amount. Set the annual operation ratio
(consider 365 days × 24h as 100%).
9999
No function
899
Operation time rate
(estimated value)
C0
(900)
FM terminal
calibration
---
---
---
Calibrate the scale of the meter connected
to terminal FM.
{
×
{
C1
(901)
AM terminal
calibration
---
---
---
Calibrate the scale of the analog meter
connected to terminal AM.
{
×
{
{
×
{
{
{
{
0.1%
9999
C2 (902)
Refer to Pr.125 and Pr.126.
to
C7 (905)
C42 (934)
Refer to Pr.127 to Pr.134.
to
C45 (935)
989
990
Parameter copy
alarm release
PU buzzer control
1
1
10/100 10/100
*17
1
Parameters for alarm release at parameter
copy
*17
*17 The setting depends on the inverter
capacity (55K or less/75k or more)
0
Without buzzer
1
With buzzer
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
100
{: enabled
× : disabled
Refer to Pr.52.
Load factor
897
———
Incre Initial
ments Value
892
894
———
Name
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
Name
Incre Initial
ments Value
Range
Description
All
Para Para
para
meter meter
meter
copy clear
clear
{: enabled
× : disabled
991
PU contrast
adjustment
1
58
0 to 63
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be
performed.
0 (Light) → 63 (Dark)
Pr.CL
Parameter clear
1
0
0, 1
Setting "1" returns all parameters except calibration
parameters to the initial values.
ALLC
Er.CL
All parameter clear
1
0
0, 1
Setting "1" returns all parameters to the initial values.
Faults history clear
1
0
0, 1
Setting "1" will clear eight past faults.
PCPY
Parameter copy
1
0
{
{
0
Cancel
1
Read the source parameters to the operation panel.
2
Write the parameters copied to the operation panel to the
destination inverter.
3
Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel.
{
Parameter list
Related
parameters
Parameter
4
ADJUSTMENT
Parameter clear,
parameter copy
Contrast adjustment
of the parameter unit
Function
Parameter list
101
Reset method of protective function
5 TROUBLESHOOTING
When a fault occurs in the inverter, the inverter trips and the PU display automatically changes to any of the following
fault or alarm indications.
If the fault does not correspond to any of the following faults or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales
representative or distributor.
• Retention of fault output signal.................When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the
inverter is opened when a fault occurs, the inverter's control power will be
lost and the fault output will not be held.
• Fault or alarm indication ...........................When a fault or alarm occurs, the operation panel display automatically
switches to the fault or alarm indication
• Resetting method .....................................When a fault occurs, the inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset,
therefore, the inverter cannot restart. (Refer to page 102.)
• When any fault occurs, take the appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
Not doing so may lead to the inverter fault and damage.
Inverter fault or alarm indications are roughly divided as below.
(1) Error message
A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FRPU04 /FR-PU07) is displayed. The inverter does not trip.
(2) Warnings
The inverter does not trip even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will
lead to a fault.
(3) Alarm
The inverter does not trip. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
5.1 Reset method of protective function
(1) Resetting the inverter
The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal thermal integrated value
of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
Inverter recovers about 1s after the reset is released.
Operation 1: ..... Using the operation panel, press
to reset the inverter.
(This may only be performed when a fault occurs. (Refer to page 108 for
fault.))
Operation 2:...... Switch OFF the power once, then switch it ON again after the indicator
of the operation panel turns OFF.
ON
OFF
Operation 3: ..... Turn on the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s. (If the RES signal is
kept on, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a reset
status.)
Inverter
RES
SD
102
List of fault or alarm display
5.2 List of fault or alarm display
Output side earth (ground)
fault overcurrent
111
Operation panel lock
104
E.LF
Output phase loss
111
Er1 to 4 Parameter write error
104
E.OHT
External thermal relay
operation *2
111
Warnings
oL
RB
TH
Error
Stall prevention
(overcurrent)
Stall prevention
(overvoltage)
Regenerative brake
prealarm
Electronic thermal relay
function prealarm
105
105
106
106
107
107
PS
PU stop
106
MT
Maintenance signal output
107
CP
Parameter copy
107
FN
Fan alarm
107
E.OC1
E.OC2
E.OC3
E.OV1
E.OV2
E.OV3
E.THT
E.THM
Overcurrent trip during
acceleration
Overcurrent trip during
constant speed
Overcurrent trip during
deceleration or stop
Regenerative overvoltage
trip during acceleration
Regenerative overvoltage
trip during constant speed
Regenerative overvoltage trip
during deceleration or stop
Inverter overload trip
(electronic thermal relay function)
Motor overload trip
(electronic thermal relay function)
108
108
108
109
109
Fault
Error message
rE1 to 4 Copy operation error
OL
Alarm
Refer
to
E.GF
Err.
Fault
Name
116
HOLD
to
Operation Panel
Indication
Refer
to
Faults history
E---
to
Name
/
/
E.PTC* PTC thermistor operation
112
E.OPT Option fault
112
E.OP1 Communication option fault
112
E. 1
Option fault
112
E.PE
Parameter storage device
fault
112
E.PUE PU disconnection
113
E.RET Retry count excess
113
Parameter storage device
E.PE2*
fault
113
E. 5 /
E. 6 /
CPU fault
E. 7 /
E.CPU
113
Operation panel power
supply short circuit, RS-485
terminal power supply short
circuit
24VDC power output short
E.P24
circuit
Output current detection
E.CDO*
value exceeded
Inrush current limit circuit
E.IOH*
fault
Communication fault
E.SER*
(inverter)
E.CTE
113
114
114
114
114
109
E.AIE* Analog input fault
114
109
E.PID* PID signal fault
114
110
E.FIN
Fin overheat
110
E.IPF
Instantaneous power failure
110
E.BE
Brake transistor alarm
detection/internal circuit fault
110
E.UVT Undervoltage
111
E.ILF*
Input phase loss
111
E.OLT
Stall prevention
111
E.13
Internal circuit fault
115
* If an error occurs when using the FR-PU04/FR-PU07, "Fault 14" is
displayed on the FR-PU04/FR-PU07.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
5
103
Causes and corrective actions
5.3 Causes and corrective actions
(1) Error Message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
HOLD
Operation panel lock
Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
104
is invalid. (Refer to page 43.)
--------------
Press
for 2s to release lock.
Er1
Write disable error
1. You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to disable
parameter write.
2. Frequency jump setting range overlapped.
3. Adjustable 5 points V/F settings overlapped
4. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication
1. Check the setting of Pr. 77 Parameter write selection (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual
(applied).)
2. Check the settings of Pr. 31 to 36 (frequency jump). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual
(applied).)
3. Check the settings of Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 (Adjustable 5 points V/F). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the
Instruction Manual (applied).)
4. Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
Er2
Write error during operation
When parameter write was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is enabled
independently of operating status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF (STR) is on.
1. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
2. Check that the inverter is not operating.
1. Set "2" in Pr. 77.
2. After stopping operation, make parameter setting.
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Er3
Calibration error
Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close.
Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
Instruction Manual (applied).)
the
Er4
Mode designation error
· You attempted to make parameter setting in the NET operation mode when Pr. 77 is not "2".
· If a parameter write was performed when the command source is not at the operation panel (FRDU07).
1. Check that operation mode is "PU operation mode".
2. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
3. Check the Pr. 551 setting.
1. After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page
71.)
2. After setting "2" in Pr. 77, make parameter setting.
3. Set Pr.551 = "2 (initial setting)". (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Causes and corrective actions
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Description
Corrective action
rE1
Parameter read error
An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy reading.
-------------· Make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 73.)
· Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
rE2
Parameter write error
1. You attempted to perform parameter copy write during operation.
2. An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy writing.
Is the FWD or REV LED of the operation panel (FR-DU07) lit or flickering?
1. After stopping operation, make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 73.)
2. Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
rE3
Parameter verification error
1. Data on the operation panel side and inverter side are different.
2. An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter verification.
Check for the parameter setting of the source inverter and inverter to be verified.
1. Press
to continue verification.
Make parameter verification again. (Refer to page 74.)
2. Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
rE4
Model error
1. A different model was used for parameter write and verification during parameter copy.
2. When parameter copy write is stopped after parameter copy read is stopped
1. Check that the verified inverter is the same model.
2. Check that the power is not turned off or an operation panel is not disconnected, etc. during
parameter copy read.
1. Use the same model (FR-F700 series) for parameter copy and verification.
2. Perform parameter copy read again.
Err.
1. The RES signal is on
2. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact fault of the connector)
3. When the voltage drops in the inverter's input side.
4. When the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) and the main circuit power(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) are
connected to a separate power, it may appear at turning on of the main circuit. It is not a fault.
1. Turn off the RES signal.
2. Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
3. Check the voltage on the inverter's input side.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
5
105
Causes and corrective actions
(2) Warnings
When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OL
Stall prevention (overcurrent)
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until
During
the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip.
acceleration
When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this
function increases the frequency again.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.
During
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function lowers the frequency until the
constantoverload current decreases to prevent overcurrent trip. When the overload current has
speed
decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency
operation
up to the set value.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until
During
the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip.
deceleration
When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this
function decreases the frequency again.
1. Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large.
2. Check that the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small.
3. Check that the load is not too heavy.
4. Are there any failure in peripheral devices?
5. Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency is not too large.
· Check the motor for use under overload.
6. Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is appropriate.
1. Increase or decrease the Pr. 0 Torque boost value by 1% and check the motor status. (Refer to page 66.)
2. Set a larger value in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 68.)
3. Reduce the load weight.
4. Try Simple magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80).
5. Change the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting.
6. Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level. (The initial value is
120%.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level
with Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr. 156 Stall prevention
operation selection. (Use Pr. 156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
oL
PU stop
Description
Stop with
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
PS
106
PS
of the PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. (For Pr.
75, refer to the chapter 4 of
Corrective action
oL
Stall prevention (overcurrent)
· If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive and exceeds the
regenerative energy consumption capability, this function stops the decrease in
frequency to prevent overvoltage trip. As soon as the regenerative energy has
During
decreased, deceleration resumes.
deceleration · If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when regeneration
avoidance function is selected (Pr. 882 = 1), this function increases the speed to
prevent overvoltage trip. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
· Check for sudden speed reduction.
· Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886) is being used? (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the
Instruction Manual (applied).)
The deceleration time may change.
Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 Deceleration time.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Check point
OL
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check for a stop made by pressing
Turn the start signal off and release with
of the operation panel.
.
Causes and corrective actions
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
RB
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
RB
Regenerative brake prealarm
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake
duty value. When the setting of Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty is the initial value (Pr. 70 ="0"), this
warning does not occur. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E.
OV_) occurs.
The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the RBP
signal output, assign the function by setting "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied))
Appears only for the 75K or more.
• Check that the brake resistor duty is not high.
• Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values are
correct.
• Increase the deceleration time.
• Check the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values.
TH
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
TH
Electronic thermal relay function prealarm
Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the
preset level. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor overload trip (E.
THM) occurs.
The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for the THP
signal output, assign the function by setting "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied))
1. Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
2. Is the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting is appropriate? (Refer to page 46.)
1. Reduce the load weight or the number of operation times.
2. Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 46.)
MT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
————
MT
Maintenance signal output
Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time.
When the setting of Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time is the initial value (Pr. 504 = "9999"),
this protective function does not function.
The Pr. 503 Maintenance timer setting is larger than the Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time
setting. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Setting "0" in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer erases the signal.
CP
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
————
CP
Parameter copy
Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of 55K or less and 75K or more.
Resetting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.90, Pr.158, Pr.190 to Pr.196,
Pr.557 and Pr.893 is necessary.
Set the initial value in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
(3) Alarm
When an alarm occurs, the output is not shut off. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter
setting. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
Instruction Manual (applied).)
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
FN
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
the
5
FN
Fan alarm
For the inverter that contains a cooling fan,
appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan
stops due to a fault or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check the cooling fan for an alarm.
Check for fan failure. Please contact your sales representative.
107
Causes and corrective actions
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.OC1
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OC During Acc
Overcurrent trip during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated current during
acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
1. Check for sudden acceleration.
2. Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in vertical lift application.
3. Check for output short circuit.
4. Check that the Pr. 3 Base frequency setting is not 60Hz when the motor rated frequency is 50Hz.
5. Check that stall prevention operation is correct.
6. Check that the regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes
larger than the V/F reference voltage at regeneration and overcurrent occurs due to the high
voltage.)
1. Increase the acceleration time.
(Shorten the downward acceleration time in vertical lift application.)
2. When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter.
If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.
3. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
4. Set the Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz. (Refer to page 47.)
5. Perform a correct stall prevention operation. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual
(applied).)
6. Set base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage. (Refer to the chapter
4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
108
E.OC2
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Stedy Spd OC
Overcurrent trip during constant speed
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated current during
constant speed operation, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
1. Check for sudden load change.
2. Check for output short circuit.
3. Check that stall prevention operation is correct.
1. Keep load stable.
2. Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit.
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
E.OC3
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OC During Dec
Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated inverter current
during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated to
stop the inverter output.
1. Check for sudden speed reduction.
2. Check for output short circuit.
3. Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
4. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
1. Increase the deceleration time.
2. Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit.
3. Check the mechanical brake operation.
4. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Causes and corrective actions
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
*1
E.OV1
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OV During Acc
Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
1. Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during descending acceleration with lifting load)
2. Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is not lower than the no load current.
1. · Decrease the acceleration time.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886).
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
2. Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.
E.OV2
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Stedy Spd OV
Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
1. Check for sudden load change.
2. Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is not lower than the no load current.
1. · Keep load stable.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886).
(Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
2. Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.
E.OV3
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OV During Dec
Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
· Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the load)
· Longer the brake cycle.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual
(applied).)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
E.THT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Inv. Overload
Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) *1
If a current not less than 120% of the rated output current flows and overcurrent trip does not occur
(170% or less), the electronic thermal relay activates to stop the inverter output in order to protect the
output transistors. (Overload capacity 120% 60s inverse-time characteristic)
· Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
· Check that torque boost setting is not too large (small).
· Check that load pattern selection setting is appropriate for the load pattern of the using machine.
· Check the motor for use under overload.
· Increase acceleration/deceleration time.
· Adjust the torque boost setting.
· Set the load pattern selection setting according to the load pattern of the using machine.
· Reduce the load weight.
Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.
109
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
5
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
*1
E.THM
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Motor Ovrload
Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) *1
The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced
cooling capability during constant-speed operation and pre-alarm (TH display) is output when the
integrated value reaches 85% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting and the protection circuit is
activated to stop the inverter output when the integrated value reaches the specified value. When
running a special motor such as a multi-pole motor or multiple motors, provide a thermal relay on the
inverter output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
1. Check the motor for use under overload.
2. Check that the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
1. Reduce the load weight.
2. For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 Applied motor.
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction
Manual (applied).)
Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
110
E.FIN
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
H/Sink O/Temp
Fin overheat
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink
overheat protection operation temperature.
For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26" (positive logic) or
"126" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to the chapter 4
of
the Instruction Manual (applied))
1. Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
2. Check for heatsink clogging.
3. Check that the cooling fan is stopped. (Check that
is displayed on the operation panel.)
1. Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.
2. Clean the heatsink.
3. Replace the cooling fan.
E.IPF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Inst. Pwr. Loss
Instantaneous power failure
If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the instantaneous
power failure protective function is activated to trip the inverter in order to prevent the control circuit from
malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms, the fault output is not provided, and the
inverter restarts if the start signal is on upon power restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an
instantaneous power failure is within 15ms.) In some operating status (load magnitude, acceleration/
deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration.
When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied))
Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
· Remedy the instantaneous power failure.
· Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure.
· Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57). (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
E.BE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Br. Cct. Fault
Brake transistor alarm detection/internal circuit fault
This function stops the inverter output if a fault occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake
transistors when using functions of the 75K or more.
In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately.
For the 55K or less, it appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
· Reduce the load inertia.
· Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.
· Check that the brake resistor selected is correct.
For the 75K or more, when the protective function is activated even if the above measures are taken,
replace the brake unit with a new one.
For the 55K or less, replace the inverter.
Causes and corrective actions
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.UVT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Under Voltage
Undervoltage
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions.
In addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if
the power supply voltage decreases below about 150V (300VAC for the 400V class), this function
stops the inverter output.
When a jumper is not connected across P/+-P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated.
When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the
Instruction Manual (applied))
1. Check for start of large-capacity motor.
2. Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P/+-P1.
1. Check the power supply system equipment such as the power supply.
2. Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P/+-P1.
3. If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
E.ILF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
Input phase loss
Input phase loss
This fault is output when function valid setting (=1) is set in Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection
and one phase of the three phase power input is lost.
When the setting of Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection is the initial value (Pr. 872 = "0"), this fault
does not occur. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
· Wire the cables properly.
· Repair a break portion in the cable.
· Check the Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection setting.
E.OLT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Stll Prev STP ( OL shown during stall
prevention operation)
Stall prevention
If the frequency has fallen to 0.5Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, a fault (E.OLT)
appears and trips the inverter. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
· Check the motor for use under overload. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
(applied).)
· Reduce the load weight.
E.GF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
the Instruction Manual
Ground Fault
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
This function stops the inverter output if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth
(ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output (load) side.
Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection cable.
Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
E.LF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
E. LF
Output phase loss
This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side
(load side) is lost.
· Check the wiring (Check that the motor is normal.)
· Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
· Wire the cables properly.
· Check the Pr. 251 Output phase loss protection selection setting.
E.OHT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
5
OH Fault
External thermal relay operation
If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection, or the internally mounted
temperature relay in the motor, etc. switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.
Functions when "7" (OH signal) is set to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
When the initial value (without OH signal assigned) is set, this protective function does not function.
· Check for motor overheating.
· Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection).
· Reduce the load and operating duty.
· Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
111
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
112
E.PTC
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
PTC activated
PTC thermistor operation
Trips when the motor overheat status is detected for 10s or more by the external PTC thermistor input
connected to the terminal AU.
This fault functions when "63" is set in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection and AU/PTC switchover
switch is set in PTC side. When the initial value (Pr. 184 = "4") is set, this protective function does not
function.
· Check the connection between the PTC thermistor switch and thermal relay protector.
· Check the motor for operation under overload.
· Is valid setting ( = 63) selected in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection ? (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Reduce the load weight.
E.OPT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Option Fault
Option fault
Appears when the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 accidentally when a
high power factor converter is connected. Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the
plug-in option is changed.
· Check that the AC power supply is not connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when a high
power factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) is
connected.
· Check the parameter (Pr. 30) setting and wiring.
· The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
when a high power factor converter is connected. Please contact your sales representative.
· Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer to
instruction manual of each option)
E.OP1
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Option 1 Fault
Communication option fault
Stops the inverter output when a communication line fault occurs in the communication option.
· Check for a wrong option function setting and operation.
· Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
· Check for a break in the communication cable.
· Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
· Check the option function setting, etc.
· Connect the plug-in option securely.
· Check the connection of communication cable.
E. 1
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 1
Option fault
Stops the inverter output if a contact fault or the like of the connector between the inverter and
communication option occurs.
Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
1. Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
2. Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter.
1. Connect the plug-in option securely.
2. Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
inverter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative
or distributor.
3. Return the switch position for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer
to
instruction manual of each option)
E.PE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Corrupt Memry
Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)
Trips when a fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable
RAM write. Note that powering off returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
E.PE2
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board)
Trips when a fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
——————
Please contact your sales representative.
E.PUE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
E.RET
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Retry No Over
Retry count excess
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function trips the inverter.
Functions only when Pr. 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence is set. When the initial value (Pr. 67 = "0")
is set, this fault does not occur.
Find the cause of fault occurrence.
Eliminate the cause of the fault preceding this error indication.
E. 6
E. 7
Fault 5
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
E.CPU
Name
Description
Check point
PU Leave Out
PU disconnection
· This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended,
e.g. the operation panel and parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr.
75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
· This function stops the inverter output when communication errors occurred consecutively for more
than permissible number of retries when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121 Number of PU
communication retries during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
· This function stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 122
PU communication check time interval during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
· Check that the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted tightly.
· Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Fit the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) securely.
E. 5
Operation Panel
Indication
Fault 14
PR storage alarm
Fault 6
Fault 7
CPU Fault
CPU fault
Stops the inverter output if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
· Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
inverter.
· Please contact your sales representative.
E.CTE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
————
E.CTE
Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
When the operation panel power supply (PU connector) is shorted, this function shuts off the power
output and stops the inverter output. At this time, the operation panel (parameter unit) cannot be used
and RS-485 communication from the PU connector cannot be made. When the internal power supply
for RS-485 terminals are shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made.
To reset, enter the RES signal or switch power off, then on again.
1. Check for a short circuit in the PU connector cable.
2. Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
1. Check the PU and cable.
2. Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals
113
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
5
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check Point
Corrective Action
114
E.P24
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
E.P24
24VDC power output short circuit
When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, all external contact inputs switch off. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES
signal. To reset it, use the operation panel or switch power off, then on again.
· Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
· Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
E.CDO
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
OC detect level
Output current detection value exceeded
This functions stops the inverter output when the output current exceeds the setting of Pr.150 Output
current detection level, or the output current falls below the setting of Pr.152 Zero current detection level.
This function is active when Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection is set to "1, 10, 11".
When the initial value (Pr. 167 = "0") is set, this fault does not occur.
Check the settings of Pr. 150 Output current detection level, Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time,
Pr. 152 Zero current detection level, Pr. 153 Zero current detection time, Pr. 166 Output current detection signal
retention time, Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection. (Refer to the chapter 4 of
the
Instruction Manual (applied).)
E.IOH
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
Inrush overheat
Inrush current limit circuit fault
Trips when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheats. The inrush current limit circuit fault
· Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
· Check that no meltdown is found in the primary side fuse (5A) in the power supply circuit of the
inrush current suppression circuit contactor (FR-F740-132K or more) or no fault is found in the power
supply circuit of the contactor.
· Check that the power supply circuit of inrush current limit circuit contactor is not damaged.
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
E.SER
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
VFD Comm error
Communication fault (inverter)
This function stops the inverter output when communication error occurs consecutively for more than
permissible retry count when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 335 RS-485 communication retry count
during RS-485 communication from the RS-485 terminals. This function also stops the inverter output if
communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval.
Check the RS-485 terminal wiring.
Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.
E.AIE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
Analog in error
Analog input fault
Trips when 30mA or more is input or a voltage (7.5V or more) is input with the terminal 2/4 set to
current input.
Check the setting of Pr. 73 Analog input selection and Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection. (Refer to the chapter
4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 73 Analog input selection or Pr. 267 Terminal
4 input selection to voltage input.
E.PID
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
Fault
PID signal fault
If any of PID upper limit (FUP), PID lower limit (FDN), and PID deviation limit (Y48) turns ON during PID
control, inverter shuts off the output. This function is active under the following parameter settings: Pr.554 PID
signal operation selection ≠ "0,10", Pr.131 PID upper limit ≠ "9999", Pr.132 PID lower limit ≠ "9999", and Pr.553 PID
deviation limit ≠ "9999". This protective function is not active in the initial setting (Pr.554 = "0", Pr.131 = "9999",
Pr.132 = "9999", Pr.553 = "9999").
Check if the measured PID value is greater than the upper limit (Pr.131) or smaller than the lower limit (Pr.132).
Check if the absolute PID deviation value is greater than the limit value (Pr.553).
Make correct settings for Pr.131 PID upper limit, Pr.132 PID lower limit, Pr.553 PID deviation limit. (Refer to the
chapter 4 of
the Instruction Manual (applied))
Correspondences between digital and
actual characters
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Corrective action
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
E.13
Fault 13
Internal circuit fault
Trips when an internal circuit error occurred.
Please contact your sales representative.
CAUTION
• If protective functions of E.ILF, E.PTC, E.PE2, E.CDO, E.IOH, E.SER, E.AIE, E.PID are activated when using the FR-PU04,
"Fault 14" appears.
Also when the faults history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
• If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
5.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters
There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters
displayed on the operation panel.
Digital
Actual
Digital
Actual
0
A
M
1
B
N
2
C
O
3
D
o
4
E
P
5
F
S
6
G
T
7
H
U
8
I
V
9
J
r
L
Digital
-
TROUBLESHOOTING
Actual
5
115
Check and clear of the faults history
5.5 Check and clear of the faults history
(1) Check for the faults history
Monitor/frequency setting
Parameter setting
[Operation panel is used
for operation]
Faults history
[Parameter setting change]
[Operation for displaying faults history]
Eight past faults can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault exists,
is displayed.
Output frequency
Flickering
Output current
Flickering
Flickering
Energization time *
Flickering
Output voltage
Flickering
Faults history number
(The number of past faults is displayed.)
Press the
setting
dial.
Flickering
Flickering
*
116
Press the
setting
dial.
Press the
setting
dial.
The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again
from 0. When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) in the indication of 1h = 0.001, and
thereafter, it is added up from 0.
Check and clear of the faults history
(2) Clearing procedure
POINT
· The faults history can be cleared by setting "1" in Er.CL Faults history clear.
Display
Operation
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
The parameter
number previously
read appears.
2.Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3.Turn
until
(faults history clear)
appears.
4.Press
"
to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.
5.Turn
to change
it to the setting value " ".
to set.
Flicker ··· Faults history clear complete!!
· Press
to read another parameter.
· Press
to show the setting again.
· Press
twice to show the next parameter.
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.Press
5
117
Check first when you have a trouble
5.6
Check first when you have a trouble
5.6.1
Motor does not start
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Countermeasures
to
page
Power ON a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB), an
earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or a magnetic
contactor (MC).
—
Appropriate power supply voltage is not applied.
Check for the decreased input voltage, input phase loss,
(Operation panel display is not provided.)
and wiring.
If only the control power is ON when using a separate
power source for the control circuit, turn ON the main
Main
17
circuit power.
Circuit
Check the wiring between the inverter and the motor.
If commercial power supply-inverter switchover function
Motor is not connected properly.
is active, check the wiring of the magnetic contactor
10
connected between the inverter and the motor.
The jumper across P/+ and P1 is disconnected.
(55K or less)
Securely fit a jumper across P/+ and P1.
When using a DC reactor (FR-HEL), remove the jumper
10
across P/+ and P1, and then connect the DC reactor.
Check the start command source, and input a start
signal.
Start signal is not input.
PU operation mode:
/
40
External operation mode : STF/STR signal
Turn ON only one of the forward and reverse rotation
Both the forward and reverse rotation start signals (STF,
start signals (STF or STR).
STR) are input simultaneously.
If STF and STR signals are turned ON simultaneously in
19
the initial setting, a stop command is given.
Frequency command is zero.
Check the frequency command source and enter a
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
frequency command.
AU signal is not ON when terminal 4 is used for
frequency setting.
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
Turn ON the AU signal.
Turning ON the AU signal activates terminal 4 input.
40
19
Turn MRS or RES signal OFF.
Output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is ON.
Input
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
Signal
Inverter starts the operation with a given start command
and a frequency command after turning OFF MRS or
RES signal.
Before turning OFF, ensure the safety.
CS signal is OFF when automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr. 57
≠ "9999").
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering. )
Turn ON the CS signal.
Restart operation is enabled when restart after
instantaneous power signal (CS) is ON.
Check that the control logic switchover jumper connector
Jumper connector of sink - source is wrongly selected.
is correctly installed.
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
If it is not installed correctly, input signal is not
22
recognized.
Voltage/current input switch is not correctly set for analog
Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch
input signal (0 to 5V/0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA).
correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
the setting.
During the External operation mode, check the method
was pressed.
(Operation panel indication is
(PS).)
Two-wire or three-wire type connection is wrong.
118
19
of restarting from a
input stop from PU.
Check the connection.
Connect STOP signal when three-wire type is used.
106
95
Check first when you have a trouble
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Countermeasures
to
page
Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is improper when V/F control is
used.
Increase Pr. 0 setting by 0.5% increments while
observing the rotation of a motor.
66
If that makes no difference, decrease the setting.
Check the Pr. 78 setting.
Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is set.
Set Pr. 78 when you want to limit the motor rotation to
85
only one direction.
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is wrong.
Check the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7)
are improper.
settings.
running frequency.
Setting
methods of start command and frequency command.
Bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings
Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting is greater than the
Parameter
Select the operation mode which corresponds with input
The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal
Set the frequency command according to the
application.
Especially, Pr. 1 Maximum frequency is zero.
Set Pr. 1 higher than the actual frequency used.
Pr. 15 Jog frequency setting is lower than Pr. 13 Starting
Set Pr. 15 Jog frequency higher than Pr. 13 Starting
frequency.
frequency.
Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select
an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
Start signal operation selection is set by the Pr. 250 Stop
Check Pr. 250 setting and connection of STF and STR
selection
signals.
deceleration stop function is selected.
79
is less than the value set in Pr. 13.
as multi-speed operation) are zero.
Inverter decelerated to a stop when power failure
88
Set running frequency higher than Pr. 13.
Frequency settings of various running frequency (such
Operation mode and a writing device do not match.
40
67
80
71, 97
95
When power is restored, ensure the safety, and turn
OFF the start signal once, then turn ON again to restart.
96
Inverter restarts when Pr. 261="2, 22".
y Set Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection = "1"
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
function or power failure stop function is activated.
(Performing overload operation during input phase loss
may cause voltage insufficiency, and that may result in
detection of power failure.)
(input phase failure protection active).
y Disable the automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure function and power failure stop function.
y Reduce the load.
83, 96
y Increase the acceleration time if the automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure function or power
Load
Reduce the load.
—
Shaft is locked.
Inspect the machine (motor).
—
TROUBLESHOOTING
failure stop function occurred during acceleration.
Load is too heavy.
5
119
Check first when you have a trouble
5.6.2
Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise
When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency of 3kHz or more set in Pr. 72, the carrier frequency will automatically
decrease if the output current of the inverter exceeds the value in parenthesis of the rated output current on page 134. This
may cause the motor noise to increase. But it is not a fault.
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Countermeasures
to
page
Input
signal
Parameter
Disturbance due to EMI when frequency command is
given from analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4).
Take countermeasures against EMI.
Increase the Pr. 74 Input filter time constant if steady
operation cannot be performed due to EMI.
Setting
85
In the initial setting, Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection is
No carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are
generated.
enabled to change motor noise to an unoffending
complex tone. Therefore, no carrier frequency noises
84
(metallic noises) are generated.
Set Pr. 240 = "0" to disable this function.
Set Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (Frequency jump).
Resonance occurs. (output frequency)
Parameter
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the
natural frequency of a mechanical system, these
82
parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
Change Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Setting
Resonance occurs. (carrier frequency)
Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect
on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical
84
system or a motor.
To stabilize the measured value, change the proportional
band (Pr. 129) to a larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130)
Gain adjustment during PID control is insufficient.
to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134)
89
to a slightly shorter time.
Check the calibration of set point and measured value.
Mechanical looseness
Others
Adjust machine/equipment so that there is no
mechanical looseness.
—
Contact the motor manufacturer.
Motor
5.6.3
Operating with output phase loss
Refer
Possible Cause
points
Fan cover was not correctly installed when a cooling fan
was replaced.
to
Install a fan cover correctly.
130
Motor generates heat abnormally
Check
points
Motor
Main
Circuit
Parameter
120
Countermeasures
page
Fan
Setting
—
—
Inverter generates abnormal noise
Check
5.6.4
Check the motor wiring.
Refer
Possible Cause
Countermeasures
to
page
Motor fan is not working
Clean the motor fan.
(Dust is accumulated.)
Improve the environment.
Phase to phase insulation of the motor is insufficient.
Check the insulation of the motor.
The inverter output voltage (U, V, W) are unbalanced.
Check the output voltage of the inverter.
Check the insulation of the motor.
—
—
126
The Pr. 71 Applied motor setting is wrong.
Check the Pr. 71 Applied motor setting.
84
Motor current is large.
Refer to "5.6.11 Motor current is too large"
123
Check first when you have a trouble
5.6.5
Motor rotates in the opposite direction
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Countermeasures
to
page
Main
Circuit
Input
Phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is
Connect phase sequence of the output cables (terminal
incorrect.
U, V, W) to the motor correctly
The start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are
Check the wiring. (STF: forward rotation , STR: reverse
connected improperly.
rotation)
10
19
The polarity of the frequency command is negative
signal
during the polarity reversible operation set by Pr. 73
Check the polarity of the frequency command.
Analog input selection.
Speed greatly differs from the setting
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
to
page
Frequency setting signal is incorrectly input.
Input
The input signal lines are affected by external EMI.
signal
Parameter
Setting
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings
are improper.
Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump) settings are improper.
Load
Parameter
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
Setting
Measure the input signal level.
—
Take countermeasures against EMI such as using
shielded wires for input signal lines.
Check the settings of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, Pr. 2
Minimum frequency, Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
78
Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings.
88
Narrow down the range of frequency jump.
82
Reduce the load weight.
—
Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in
80
frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC…).)
Motor
5.6.7
Countermeasures
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
—
Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Parameter
Setting
Countermeasures
to
page
Acceleration/deceleration time is too short.
Increase acceleration/deceleration time.
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F
Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by
control, so the stall prevention function is activated.
0.5% increments to the setting.
The base frequency does not match the motor
For V/F control, set Pr. 3 Base frequency and Pr. 47 Second
characteristics.
V/F (base frequency).
68
66
78
If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration
Regeneration avoidance operation is performed
avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr. 886
99
Regeneration avoidance voltage gain.
Load
Parameter
Setting
Motor
Reduce the load weight.
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
—
Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in
80
frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC…).)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
—
121
TROUBLESHOOTING
5.6.6
5
Check first when you have a trouble
5.6.8
Speed varies during operation
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Countermeasures
to
page
Load
Load varies during an operation.
Select Simple magnetic flux vector control
86
Frequency setting signal is varying.
Check the frequency setting signal.
—
Set filter to the analog input terminal using Pr. 74 Input
The frequency setting signal is affected by EMI.
Input
filter time constant.
85
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using
shielded wires for input signal lines.
signal
Malfunction is occurring due to the undesirable current
generated when the transistor output unit is connected.
Multi-speed command signal is chattering.
Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too large.
Use terminal PC (terminal SD when source logic) as a
common terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by
23
undesirable current.
Take countermeasures to suppress chattering.
Change the Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage setting (about
3%) under V/F control.
—
78
Pr. 80 Motor capacity setting is improper for the
capacities of the inverter and the motor for Simple
Check the Pr. 80 Motor capacity setting.
86
magnetic flux vector control.
Wiring length is too long for V/F control, and a voltage
Parameter
drop occurs.
Adjust Pr. 0 Torque boost by increasing with 0.5%
increments for low-speed operation.
Change to Simple magnetic flux vector control.
Setting
66
86
Disable automatic control functions, such as energy
saving operation, fast-response current limit function,
Hunting occurs by the generated vibration, for example,
when structural rigidity at load side is insufficient.
regeneration avoidance function, Simple magnetic flux
vector control and stall prevention.
—
Adjust so that the control gain decreases and the level of
safety increases.
Change Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
5.6.9
84
Operation mode is not changed properly
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Input
signal
Countermeasures
to
page
Check that the STF and STR signals are OFF.
Start signal (STF or STR) is ON.
When either is ON, the operation mode cannot be
71
changed.
When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is "0" (initial
value), the inverter is placed in the External operation
mode at input power ON. To switch to the PU operation
Parameter
Pr. 79 setting is improper.
mode, press
on the operation panel (press
71
when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used) .
Setting
At other settings (1 to 4, 6, 7), the operation mode is
limited accordingly.
122
Operation mode and a writing device do not
Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select
correspond.
an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
71, 97
Check first when you have a trouble
5.6.10 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Countermeasures
to
page
Main
Circuit,
Control
Circuit
Power is not input.
Input the power.
8
Check if the inverter front cover is installed securely.
Front
Operation panel is not properly connected to the
cover
inverter.
The inverter cover may not fit properly when using wires
whose size are 1.25mm2 or larger, or when using many
5
wires, and this could cause a contact fault of the
operation panel.
5.6.11
Motor current is too large
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Countermeasures
to
page
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F
Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by
control, so the stall prevention function is activated.
0.5% increments to the setting.
66
Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency.
Parameter
(Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19)
Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage
Change Pr. 14 Load pattern selection according to the load
characteristic.
Setting
Reduce the load weight.
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
78
(e.g. rated motor voltage).
79
—
Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in
80
frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC…).)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
—
TROUBLESHOOTING
V/F pattern is improper when V/F control is performed.
5
123
Check first when you have a trouble
5.6.12 Speed does not accelerate
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Countermeasures
to
page
Start command and frequency command are chattering.
Input
The wiring length used for analog frequency command
signal
is too long, and it is causing a voltage (current) drop.
Input signal lines are affected by external EMI.
Check if the start command and the frequency
command are correct.
—
Perform analog input bias/gain calibration.
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using
shielded wires for input signal lines.
Check the settings of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings
Minimum frequency. If you want to run the motor at 120Hz
are improper.
or higher, set Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F
Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by
control, so the stall prevention function is activated.
0.5% increments so that stall prevention does not occur.
Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings.
78
88
66
Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency.
Parameter
Setting
V/F pattern is improper when V/F control is performed.
(Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19)
Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage
Change Pr. 14 Load pattern selection according to the load
characteristic.
Reduce the load weight.
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
78
(e.g. rated motor voltage).
79
—
Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in
80
frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC…).)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.
—
During PID control, output frequency is automatically controlled to make measured value = set point.
5.6.13 Unable to write parameter setting
Refer
Check
Possible Cause
points
Operation is being performed (signal STF or STR is
signal
ON).
Stop the operation.
When Pr. 77 = "0" (initial value), write is enabled only
85
during a stop.
You are attempting to set the parameter in the External
operation mode.
Setting
to
page
Input
Parameter
Countermeasures
Choose the PU operation mode.
Or, set Pr. 77 = "2" to enable parameter write regardless
85
of the operation mode.
Parameter is disabled by the Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection setting.
Check Pr. 77 Parameter write selection setting.
Key lock is activated by the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key
Check Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection
lock operation selection setting.
setting.
Operation mode and a writing device do not
Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select
correspond.
an operation mode suitable for the purpose.
85
92
71, 97
5.6.14 Power lamp is not lit
Check
points
Main
Circuit,
Control
Circuit
124
Refer
Possible Cause
Countermeasures
to
page
Check for the wiring and the installation.
Wiring or installation is improper.
Power lamp is lit when power supply is input to the
control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21).
10
Inspection item
6 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent
any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust,
dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
• Precautions for maintenance and inspection
For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing
the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and then make
sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+-N/− of the inverter is not more than 30VDC using a tester,
etc.
6.1 Inspection item
6.1.1
Daily inspection
Basically, check for the following faults during operation.
(1) Motor operation fault
(2) Improper installation environment
(3) Cooling system fault
(4) Unusual vibration and noise
(5) Unusual overheat and discoloration
Periodic inspection
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
1) Check for cooling system fault .............. Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Tightening check and retightening ........ The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc.
Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque. (Refer to page 14.)
3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
4) Measure insulation resistance.
5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
6.1.2
6
125
Inspection item
Surrounding
environment
General Overall unit
Inspection Item
{
Improve environment
Check for unusual vibration and noise
{
Check alarm location and
retighten
{
Inspect the power supply
Check that the main circuit voltages and control
voltages are normal *1
(1)Check with megger (across main circuit
terminals and earth (ground) terminal).
(2)Check
for loose screws and bolts.
General
(3)Check for overheat traces on the parts.
(4)Check for stain
(1)Check conductors for distortion.
Conductors, cables (2)Check cable sheaths for breakage and
deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.)
Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase in
Transformer/reactor
whining sound.
Contact the manufacturer
{
{
{
{
Retighten
Contact the manufacturer
Clean
Contact the manufacturer
{
Contact the manufacturer
Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer
Contact the manufacturer
{
Check for damage.
{
Smoothing
aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor
(1)Check for liquid leakage.
(2)Check for safety valve projection and bulge.
(3)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
main circuit capacitor (Refer to page 127)
Check that the operation is normal and no chatter
is heard.
(1)Check that the output voltages across phases
with the inverter operated alone is balanced
(2)Check that no fault is found in protective and
display circuits in a sequence protective
operation test.
{
{
Parts check
Operation check
Control
circuit
protective
circuit
{
Terminal block
Relay/contactor
Overall
Aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor
Corrective Action at
Alarm Occurrence
Check the surrounding air temperature, humidity,
dirt, corrosive gas, oil mist , etc
Power supply
voltage
Main
circuit
*2
Inspection Item
Periodic
Interval
Customer's
Check
Daily and periodic inspection
Daily
Area of
Inspection
6.1.3
{
{
Contact the manufacturer
{
Contact the manufacturer
{
Contact the manufacturer
(1)Check for unusual odor and discoloration.
{
(2)Check for serious rust development
(1)Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and
deformation trance
(2)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
control circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 127.)
(1)Check for unusual vibration and noise.
(2)Check for loose screws and bolts
(3)Check for stain
(1)Check for clogging
(2)Check for stain
(1)Check for clogging
(2)Check for stain
(1)Check that display is normal.
(2)Check for stain
{
Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer
{
Contact the manufacturer
{
Replace the fan
Retighten
Clean
Cooling
Clean
system Heatsink
Clean
Clean or replace
Air filter, etc.
Clean or replace
{
Contact the manufacturer
Indication
{ Clean
Display
Stop the device and contact
Meter
Check that reading is normal
{
the manufacturer.
Stop the device and contact
Check for vibration and abnormal increase in
Load
{
Operation check
motor
the manufacturer.
operation noise
*1 It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter.
*2 One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
Cooling fan
126
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Inspection item
6.1.4
Display of the life of the inverter parts
The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, each parts of the
inrush current limit circuit is near its end. It gives an indication of replacement time .
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement.
Parts
Judgement level
Main circuit capacitor
Control circuit capacitor
Inrush current limit circuit
Cooling fan
85% of the initial capacity
Estimated 10% life remaining
Estimated 10% life remaining (Power on: 100,000 times left)
Less than 50% of the predetermined speed
For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method of (2) is
not performed. (Refer to page 128.)
(1) Display of the life alarm
· Pr. 255 Life alarm status display can be used to confirm that the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor,
cooling fan, and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level.
bit 15
7
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
• Pr.255 read
• Pr.255 setting read
bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life
Bit image is displayed
in decimal
bit2 Cooling fan life
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life
Bit
(binary)
15
1111
14
1110
13
1101
12
1100
11
1011
10
1010
9
1001
8
1000
7
0111
6
0110
5
0101
4
0100
3
0011
2
0010
1
0
0001
0000
Inrush Current
Limit Circuit Life
Cooling
Fan Life
Main Circuit
Capacitor Life
Control Circuit
Capacitor Life
: with alarm,
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Pr. 255
(decimal)
: without alarm
POINT
Life check of the main circuit capacitor needs to be done by Pr. 259. (Refer to page 128.)
6
127
Inspection item
(2) Measuring method of life of the main circuit capacitor
· If the value of capacitor capacity measured before shipment is considered as 100%, Pr. 255 bit1 is turned on when
the measured value falls below 85%.
· Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the
capacitor capacity.
1) Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.
2) Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259
3) Switch power off. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the
inverter is off.
4) After confirming that the LED of the operation panel is off, power on again.
5) Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, then read Pr. 258 and check the life of the main circuit
capacitor.
REMARKS
·
When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr. 259 = "8") or "measuring error"
(Pr. 259 = "9") occurs or it remains in "measuring start" (Pr. 259 = "1").
When measuring, avoid the following conditions to perform. In addition, even when "measurement completion" (Pr. 259 = "3") is
confirmed under the following conditions, normal measurement can not be done.
(a)FR-HC, MT-HC, FR-CV, MT-RC or sine wave filter is connected.
(b)Terminal R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to the terminals P/+ and N/−.
(c)Switch power on during measuring.
(d)The motor is not connected to the inverter.
(e)The motor is running.(The motor is coasting.)
(f)The motor capacity is two rank smaller as compared to the inverter capacity.
(g)The inverter is at an alarm stop or an alarm occurred while power is off.
(h)The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
(i)The start command is given while measuring.
· Operating environment:Surrounding air temperature (annual average 40°C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist,
dust and dirt))
Output current (80% of the inverter rated current)
POINT
For the accurate life measuring of the main circuit capacitor, perform after more than 3h passed since the turn off of
the power as it is affected by the capacitor temperature.
WARNING
When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC voltage is
applied to the motor for 1s at powering off. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering off to prevent an
electric shock.
128
Inspection item
6.1.5
Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean status.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
CAUTION
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
The display, etc. of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and
alcohol. Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.
6.1.6
Replacement of parts
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced
performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
*1
*2
Part Name
Standard Replacement Interval *1
Description
Cooling fan
Main circuit smoothing capacitor
On-board smoothing capacitor
10 years
10 years *2
10 years
Replace (as required)
Replace (as required)
Replace the board (as required)
Relays
−
as required
Fuse (185K or more)
10 years
Replace the fuse (as required)
Replacement years for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40°C
(without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc)
Output current : 80% of the inverter rated current
CAUTION
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
6
129
Inspection item
(1) Cooling fan
The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit
semiconductor is greatly affected by the surrounding air temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration is
noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
CAUTION
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
Fan Type
Inverter Model
2.2K to 5.5K
7.5K to 15K
18.5K, 22K
F720
F740
30K
37K to 55K
75K to 110K
3.7K, 5.5K
7.5K, 18.5K
22K, 30K
37K
45K to 75K
90K to 160K
185K, 220K
250K to 315K
355K, 400K
450K to 560K
MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01
MMF-08D24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1639H01
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01
MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01
MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01
MMF-08D24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1639H01
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01
MMF-09D24TS-RP1 BKO-CA1640H01
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01
9LB1424H5H03
9LB1424S5H04
Units
1
2
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
The FR-F720-0.75K, 1.5K, FR-F740-0.75K to 2.2K are not provided with a cooling fan.
• Removal (FR-F720-2.2K to 110K, FR-F740-3.7K to 160K)
1) Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.
FR-F720-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740-3.7K, 5.5K
FR-F720-7.5K to 30K
FR-F740-7.5K to 30K
FR-F720-37K or more
FR-F740-37K to 160K
2) Disconnect the fan connectors.
3) Remove the fan.
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan connection
connector
Fan
FR-F720-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740-3.7K, 5.5K
Fan *
Fan connection
connector
FR-F720-7.5K to 30K
FR-F740-7.5K to 30K
* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity. (Refer to page 130)
130
Fan *
Fan connection
connector
FR-F720-37K or more
FR-F740-37K to 160K
Inspection item
• Reinstallation (FR-F720-2.2K to 110K, FR-F740-3.7K to 160K)
1)After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
AIR FLOW
<Fan side face>
2)Reconnect the fan connectors.
FR-F720-30K
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
FR-F720-7.5K to 15K
FR-F740-7.5K to 18.5K
FR-F720-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740-3.7K, 5.5K
FR-F720-18.5K, 22K
FR-F740-22K, 30K
FR-F720-37K to 110K
FR-F740-37K to 160K
3) Reinstall the fan cover.
2. Insert hooks until
you hear a click 1. Insert hooks into
sound.
holes.
FR-F720-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740-3.7K, 5.5K
1. Insert hooks into
2. Insert hooks until
holes.
you hear a click
sound.
FR-F720-7.5K to 30K
FR-F740-7.5K to 30K
1. Insert hooks into
holes.
2. Insert hooks until
you hear a click
sound.
FR-F720-37K to 110K
FR-F740-37K to 160K
CAUTION
• Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
• When installing the fan, use care to prevent wires from being caught between the inverter and fan.
• Switch the power off before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power off,
replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.
131
6
Inspection item
• Removal (FR-F740-185K or more)
1) Remove a fan cover.
2) After removing a fan connector, remove a fan block.
3) Remove a fan.
Fan *
3)
Fan connection
connector
2)
1)
* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.
• Reinstallation (FR-F740-185K or more)
1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces
up.
AIR FLOW
<Fan side face>
2) Install fans referring to the above figure.
CAUTION
• Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
• When installing the fan, use care to prevent wires from being caught between the inverter and fan.
• Switch the power off before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power
off, replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.
132
Inspection item
(2) Replacement procedure of the cooling fan when using a heatsink protrusion attachment
(FR-A7CN)
When replacing a cooling fan, remove a top cover of the
heatsink protrusion attachment and perform replacement.
After replacing the cooling fan, replace the top cover in the
original position.
Top cover
(3) Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an
aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics
are deteriorated by the adverse effects of ripple currents, etc.
The replacement intervals greatly vary with the surrounding air temperature and operating conditions. When the
inverter is operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors about every 10 years.
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion
2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
3) Check for external crack, discoloration, fluid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the
measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.
Refer to page 129 to perform the life check of the main circuit capacitor.
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times
(switching life).
6.1.7
Inverter replacement
The inverter can be replaced with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the wiring
cover of the inverter.
1) Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2) Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
(4) Relays
6
CAUTION
Before starting inverter replacement, switch power off, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check the voltage with a tester
and such to ensure safety.
133
Rating
7 SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 Rating
•200V class
Power supply
Output
Type FR-F720-††K
0.75
Applicable motor capacity
0.75
(kW)*1
Rated capacity (kVA)*2 1.6
4.2
Rated current (A)*3
(3.6)
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
2.7
7.0
3.7
9.6
5.8
15.2
8.8
23
11.8 17.1 22.1
31
45
58
27
70
32
85
43
114
53
140
65
170
81
212
110
288
132
346
165
432
(6.0)
(8.2)
(13)
(20)
(60)
(72)
(97)
(119)
(145)
(180)
(245)
(294)
(367)
-
-
Overload current
rating*4
Voltage*5
Rated input AC
voltage/frequency
Permissible AC
voltage fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power
supply
system
capacity
(kVA)*6
Three-phase 200 to 240V
Three-phase 200 to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz
170 to 242V 50Hz, 170 to 264V 60Hz
±5%
2.1
4.0
4.8
8.0 11.5
16
20
27
32
41
52
65
79
99
-
With DC
reactor
1.2
2.6
3.3
5.0
10
16
19
24
31
41
50
61
74
110
Approx. mass (kg)
*5
*6
*7
*8
134
(49)
Without DC
reactor
Cooling system
*4
(38)
120% for 60s, 150% for 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Protective structure
(JEM 1030)*8
*1
*2
*3
(26)
8.1
Enclosed type (IP20)*7
Selfcooling
1.8 2.2
132 165
Open type (IP00)
Forced air cooling
3.5
3.5
3.5
6.5
6.5
7.8
13
13
14
23
35
35
67
70
70
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V.
When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency set to 3kHz or more, the carrier frequency automatically decreases if the inverter
output current exceeds the value in parenthesis of the rated current. This may cause the motor noise to increase.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated
duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting
range. However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and
cables).
When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the inverter changes to an open type ().
FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
Rating
•400V class
Type FR-F740-††K
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
Rated current (A)*3
1.5
1.5
2.7
3.5
2.2
2.2
3.7
4.8
3.7
3.7
5.8
7.6
5.5
5.5
8.8
11.5
7.5
7.5
12.2
16
11
11
17.5
23
15
15
22.1
29
18.5
18.5
26.7
35
22
22
32.8
43
30
30
43.4
57
37
37
53.3
70
45
45
64.8
85
55
55
80.8
106
(1.8)
(3.0)
(4.1)
(6.4)
(9.8)
(13)
(19)
(24)
(30)
(36)
(48)
(60)
(72)
(90)
120% 60s, 150% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 380 to 480V
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
Overload current rating*4
Voltage*5
Power supply
Rated input AC voltage/frequency
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation
Power supply
system capacity
(kVA)*6
Protective structure
(JEM 1030)*8
Without DC reactor
2.1
4.0
4.8
8.0
11.5
16
20
27
32
41
52
65
79
99
With DC reactor
1.2
2.6
3.3
5.0
8.1
10
16
19
24
31
41
50
61
74
Enclosed type (IP20)*7
Self-cooling
3.5
3.5
3.5
Cooling system
Approx. mass (kg)
Type FR-F740-††K
Applicable motor capacity (kW)*1
Rated capacity (kVA)*2
Output
±5%
Rated current (A)*3
3.5
3.5
Power supply
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
35
560
110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
110
165
216
132
198
260
160
247
325
185
275
361
220
329
432
250
366
481
280
416
547
315
464
610
355
520
683
400
586
770
450
659
866
500 560
733 833
962 1094
(122)
(153)
(183)
(221)
(276)
(306)
(367)
(408)
(464)
(518)
(580)
(654)
(736)
(817)
(929)
120% 60s, 150% 3s
(inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 380 to 480V
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
±5%
Permissible frequency fluctuation
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
110
137
165
198
247
275
329
366
416
464
520
586
659
733
833
Forced air cooling
110 110 175 175 175
260
260
370
370
370
Open type (IP00)
Cooling system
*1
*2
*3
35
90
137
180
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation
Approx. mass (kg)
23
90
Rated input AC voltage/frequency
With DC reactor
13
75
110
144
Voltage*5
Without DC reactor
Forced air cooling
7.5
7.5
13
6.5
75
Overload current rating*4
Power supply
system
capacity
(kVA)*6
Protective structure
(JEM 1030)*8
6.5
Open type (IP00)
37
50
57
72
72
The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency set to 3kHz or more, the carrier frequency automatically decreases if the inverter output
current exceeds the value in parenthesis of the rated current. This may cause the motor noise to increase.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty,
allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, protective structure of the inverter changes to an open
type (IP00).
FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)
SPECIFICATIONS
Output
Rated capacity (kVA)*2
0.75
0.75
1.6
2.1
7
135
Common specifications
7.2 Common specifications
High carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control)/Optimum excitation control/Simple magnetic
flux vector control
Output frequency range
0.5 to 400Hz
0.015Hz/60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit)
Frequency
Analog input
0.03Hz/60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/11bit, terminal 1: 0 to ±10V/12bit)
setting
0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to ±5V/11bit)
resolution
Digital input
0.01Hz
Analog input
Within ±0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C ± 10°C)
Frequency
accuracy
Digital input
Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency
0 to 400Hz of the base frequency can be set from constant-torque/adjustable 5 points V/F can
be selected.
characteristics
Starting torque
120% (at 3Hz) when Simple magnetic flux vector control and slip compensation are set
Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration modes are available.
setting
Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) can
DC injection brake
be changed
Operation current level can be set (0 to 150% variable), whether to use the function or not can
Stall prevention operation level
be set.
Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA are available.
Analog input
Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to 5V are available.
Frequency
setting signal
Four-digit BCD or16-bit binary using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit
Digital input
(when used with the option FR-A7AX)
Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be
Start signal
selected.
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection): multi
speed selection, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection,
selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, external thermal relay input,
HC connection (inverter operation enable signal), HC connection (instantaneous power failure
detection), PU operation/external interlock signal, PID control enable terminal, PU operation,
Input signals (twelve terminals)
external operation switchover, output stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation
command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PTC thermistor input, PID forward
reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, External-NET operation
switchover, command source switchover, DC feeding operation permission, DC feeding
cancel, and PID integral value reset.
Maximum and minimum frequency settings, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay
input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure operation, original operation continuation at an instantaneous power failure, electronic
Operational functions
bypass operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, operation mode selection, PID control,
computer link operation (RS-485).
Output signal
The following signals can be assigned to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection):
inverter running, up-to-speed, instantaneous power failure /undervoltage, overload warning,
Open collector output (five
output frequency detection, second output frequency detection, regenerative brake prealarm*4,
terminals)
electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready,
Relay output (two terminals)
output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward
rotation reverse rotation output, bypass operation-inverter switchover MC1 to MC3, fan alarm
output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm, inverter running start command on, deceleration at an
instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, PID deviation limit, during retry, during PID
Operating status
output suspension, pulse train output of output power, DC current feeding, life alarm, fault
output 3 (power-off signal), power savings average value update timing, current average
monitor, fault output 2, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, alarm output, and fault output.
When used with In addition to above, the following signal can be assigned to Pr.313 to Pr. 319 (extension output
the FR-A7AY,
terminal function selection): control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life
and inrush current limit circuit fault. (Only positive logic can be set for extension terminals of
FR-A7AR
the FR-A7AR.)
(option)
Operation specifications
Control specifications
Control method
For meter
Pulse train output
(Max. 2.4kHz: one
terminal)
Analog output
(Max. 10VDC: one
terminal)
136
The following signals can be assigned to Pr.54 FM terminal function selection and Pr. 158 AM
terminal function selection: output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output
voltage, frequency setting value, running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak
value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter,
reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty*4, PID
set value, and PID measured value.
Operation
panel (FRDU07)
Parameter
unit (FRPU07)
Operating
status
Fault definition
Interactive
guidance
Protective/
warning function
Protective
function
Environment
Warning
function
Surrounding air temperature
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature*3
Atmosphere
Altitude, vibration
The following operating status can be displayed: output frequency, motor current (steady or
peak value), output voltage, alarm indication, frequency setting, running speed, converter
output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power,
output power, load meter, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor load
factor, cumulative power, power saving effect, cumulative saving power, regenerative brake
duty*4,PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation value, inverter I/O terminal monitor,
input terminal option monitor*1, output terminal option monitor*1, option fitting status monitor*2,
terminal assignment status*2
Fault definition is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault definitions (output voltage/current/
frequency/cumulative energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored.
Function (help) for operation guide *2
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during
deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage
during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation,
heatsink overheat, instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase loss *6,
motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output phase loss, external thermal
relay operation *6, PTC thermistor operation *6, option fault, parameter error, PU disconnection,
retry count excess *6, CPU fault, operation panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output
short circuit, output current detection value excess *6, inrush current limit circuit fault,
communication fault (inverter), analog input fault, PID signal fault *6, internal circuit fault (15V
power supply), brake transistor alarm detection *4,
Fan alarm, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake
prealarm *6, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm *1*6,
parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to +65°C
Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. After that derate by 3% for every
extra 500m up to 2500m (92%) 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes) *5
*1
*2
*3
*4
Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07).
This operation guide is only available with option parameter unit (FR-PU07).
Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
Only the 75K or more functions.
*5
*6
2.9m/s2 or less for the 185K or more.
This protective function does not function in the initial status.
SPECIFICATIONS
Indication
Common specifications
7
137
Outline dimension drawings
7.3 Outline dimension drawings
7.3.1
Inverter outline dimension drawings
7.5
• FR-F720-0.75K, 1.5K
245
260
2-φ6 hole
6
5
7.5
95
110
D
Inverter Model
D1
110
125
21
36
D1
FR-F720-0.75K
FR-F720-1.5K
D
7.5
• FR-F720-2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K
• FR-F740-0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K, 5.5K
6
125
150
7.5
245
260
2-φ6 hole
140
5
45.5
* The FR-F740-0.75K to
2.2K are not provided
with cooling fans.
144
(Unit: mm)
138
Outline dimension drawings
7.5
• FR-F720-7.5K, 11K, 15K
• FR-F740-7.5K, 11K, 15K, 18.5K
6
H
7.5
H1
2-φ6 hole
195
10
D
220
D1
Inverter Model
211
FR-F720-7.5K, 11K
FR-F740-7.5K, 11K
FR-F720-15K
FR-F740-15K, 18.5K
H
H1
D
D1
260
245
170
84
300
285
190
101.5
(Unit: mm)
10
• FR-F720-18.5K, 22K, 30K
• FR-F740-22K, 30K
10
380
400
2-φ10 hole
230
250
10.5
190
101.5
* The FR-F720-30K is
not provided with a
wiring cover.
250
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
10
7
139
Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F720-37K, 45K, 55K
• FR-F740-37K, 45K, 55K
10
H
550
H1
2-φd hole
W2
3.2
W1
W
Inverter Model
FR-F720-37K
FR-F740-37K
FR-F720-45K, 55K
FR-F740-45K, 55K
D
W
W1
W2
H
H1
d
D
325
270
10
530
10
10
195
435
380
12
525
15
12
250
(Unit: mm)
140
Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-75K, 90K
10
H
H1
15
2-φ12 hole
12
3.2
W1
W
D
Inverter Model
FR-F740-75K
FR-F740-90K
W
W1
H
H1
D
435
465
380
400
525
595
550
620
250
300
• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
P1
P
H1
H 10
P1, P
E
W1
W
2
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
Within D
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H75K (FR-F740-75K)
FR-HEL-H90K (FR-F740-90K)
W
W1
H
H1
D
Mass
(kg)
140
150
120
130
320
340
295
310
185
190
16
20
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
7
141
Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-110K
• DC reactor supplied
15
2-φ12 hole
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
10
10
310
340
P1
620
595
P1
P
P
E
130
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
150
Within 195
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
10
400
465
3.2
Mass
(kg)
DC reactor Model
300
FR-HEL-H110K(FR-F740-110K)
22
(Unit: mm)
15
• FR-F720-75K, 90K, 110K
• FR-F740-132K, 160K
2-φ12 hole
• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for M12 bolt)
P1
H 10
715
740
H1 10
P1
P
P
E
W1
W
4-installation hole
(for S screw)
2
Within D
400
465
10
Earth (ground) terminal
(for S1 screw)
360
3.2
W
W1
H
H1
D
S
S1
Mass
(kg)
FR-HEL-75K(FR-F720-75K)
150
130
340
310
190
M6
M6
17
FR-HEL-90K(FR-F720-90K)
FR-HEL-110K(FR-F720-110K)
FR-HEL-H132K(FR-F740-132K)
FR-HEL-H160K(FR-F740-160K)
150
175
175
175
130
150
150
150
340
400
405
405
310
365
370
370
200
200
200
205
M6
M8
M8
M8
M6
M6
M6
M6
19
20
26
28
DC reactor Model
(Unit: mm)
142
Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-185K, 220K
985
1010
15
3-φ12 hole
200
200
3.2
10
12
49
49
380
498
185
214.5
148.5
450
• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-M6 eye nut (only for FR-HEL-H220K)
2-terminal (for M12 bolt)
P1
370 10
405 10
P1
P
P
E
150
1
175
2
4-installation hole
(for M8 screw)
Within 240
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
DC reactor Model
Mass
(kg)
FR-HEL-H185K (FR-F740-185K)
29
FR-HEL-H220K (FR-F740-220K)
30
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M6 screw)
7
143
Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-250K, 280K, 315K
984
1010
3-φ12 holes
3.2
12
300
380
300
148
680
N/-
S/L2
P/+
V
R/L1
U
P1
W
214
T/L3
• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-S2 eye nut
2-terminal (for bolt)
P1
H 10
H1 10
P1
P
P
E
W1
W
1
2
4-installation hole
(for S screw)
Within D
Earth (ground) terminal
(for S1 screw)
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H250K (FR-F740-250K)
FR-HEL-H280K (FR-F740-280K)
FR-HEL-H315K (FR-F740-315K)
W
W1
H
H1
D
S
S1
S2
φ
Mass
(kg)
190
190
210
165
165
185
440
440
495
400
400
450
250
255
250
M8
M8
M10
M8
M8
M8
M8
M8
M8
M12
M16
M16
35
38
42
(Unit: mm)
144
Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-355K, 400K
1330
1300
3-φ12 hole
12
315
315
4.5
790
T/L3
P1
N/-
U
P/+
W
V
185
222
S/L2
194
R/L1
4.5
440
• DC reactor supplied
• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal
4- 15 hole
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal (for M16 bolt)
P1
P
210
10
40
P
P
E
185
10
40
75
P
455
495 10
450 10
P1
500
P1
P1
E
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
195
Within 250
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
220
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
Within 250
Within 235
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H355K (FR-F740-355K)
Mass
(kg)
46
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H400K (FR-F740-400K)
Mass
(kg)
50
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
7
145
Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-450K
12
1580
1550
4-φ12 hole
4.5
300
300
300
4.5
440
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
U
V
W
185
227
P1
189
995
950
• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut
2-terminal
4- 15 hole
P1
10
10
455
500
P1
40
75
40
P
P
E
195
220
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
Within 270
Within 240
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M8 screw)
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H450K (FR-F740-450K)
Mass
(kg)
57
(Unit: mm)
146
Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-500K, 560K
1580
1550
4-φ12 hole
4.5
12
300
300
300
4.5
440
995
950
P/+
U
V
W
185
227
P1
189
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
• DC reactor supplied
40
Rating plate
P1
2-terminal
4- 15 hole
Earth (ground) terminal
(for M12 screw)
P
E
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
75
Within 245
2-M12 eye nut
P1
P
150
215
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H500K (FR-F740-500K)
FR-HEL-H560K (FR-F740-560K)
D1
10
D
10
H
D
D1
Mass
(kg)
345
360
455
460
405
410
67
85
(Unit: mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Within H
40
7
147
Outline dimension drawings
• Operation panel (FR-DU07)
<Outline drawing>
<Panel cutting dimension drawing>
Panel
FR-DU07
27.8
21
Airbleeding
hole
22
44
50
44
6
3
3.2max
3
20
3
72
78
81
3
16
2-M3 screw
Cable
72
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP option)
25
• Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)
<Outline drawing>
<Panel cutting dimension drawing>
25.05
(14.2)
(11.45)
2.5
83
*1
40
Air-bleeding
hole
51
50
*1
40
4-R1
*1
57.8
56.8
67
135
*1
26.5
4-φ4 hole
26.5
(Effective depth of the installation
screws hole 5.0)
M3 screw *2
80.3
148
*1 When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for
fixing the FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with
M3 nuts.
*2 Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective
depth of the installation screw hole.
(Unit: mm)
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
7.4 Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
When encasing the inverter in an enclosure, the generated heat amount in an enclosure can be greatly reduced by
installing the heatsink portion of the inverter outside the enclosure. When installing the inverter in a compact
enclosure, etc., this installation method is recommended.
7.4.1
When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)
For the FR-F720-2.2K to 110K, FR-F740-0.75K to 160K, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure using a
heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN). For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the
heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) to the inverter, refer to a manual of "heatsink protrusion attachment (FRA7CN01 to 11)".
7.4.2
Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-F740-185K or more
(1) Panel cutting
Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity.
• FR-F740-185K, 220K
• FR-F740-250K, 280K, 315K
6-M10 screw
6-M10 screw
200
300
954
15
200
662
300
954
984
Hole
Hole
15
18
985
13
484
(Unit: mm)
• FR-F740-355K, 400K
(Unit: mm)
• FR-F740-450K, 500K, 560K
6-M10 screw
315
300
300
300
SPECIFICATIONS
1508
1550
Hole
21
1258
Hole
21
1300
21
315
8-M10 screw
976
21
771
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
7
149
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
(2) Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame
• FR-F740-250K to 315K
Shift
One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lower
part of the inverter. Change the position of the rear side installation frame on the upper and lower side of the inverter to the front
side as shown on the right. When changing the installation
frames, make sure that the installation orientation is correct.
Upper
installation
frame
Lower
installation
frame
Shift
• FR-F740-185K/220K, 355K or more
Removal
Two installation frames each are attached to the upper and lower
parts of the inverter. Remove the rear side installation frame on
the upper and lower side of the inverter as shown on the right.
Upper installation
frame (rear side)
Lower installation
frame (rear side)
Removal
(3) Installation of the inverter
Push the inverter heatsink portion outside the enclosure and fix the enclosure and inverter with upper and lower
installation frame.
Enclosure
Inside the
enclosure Exhausted air
*
* For the FR-F740-250K or more, there are finger
guards behind the enclosure. Therefore, the
thickness of the panel should be less than 10mm(*1)
and also do not place anything around finger guards
to avoid contact with the finger guards.
Enclosure
Inverter
10*
1
140
Finger guard
6
Installation
frame
(Unit: mm)
Inverter Model
Dimension of
Cooling
wind the outside of
the enclosure
D1
FR-F740-185K, 220K
FR-F740-250K to 560K
D1(mm)
185
184
CAUTION
· Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure can not be used in the environment of water
drops, oil, mist, dust, etc.
· Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section.
150
For customers who are replacing the conventional model with this inverter
APPENDICES
Appendix 1 For customers who are replacing the conventional model
with this inverter
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-F500 series
(1) Instructions for installation
1)Removal procedure of the front cover was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 5.)
2)Removal procedure of the operation panel was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 5.)
3)Plug-in options of the F500 series are not compatible
4)Operation panel (FR-DU04) can not be used.
5)Setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP) can not be used.
(2) Wiring instructions
1)The control circuit terminal block can be used for the FR-F700 series without removing wiring.
Note that the wiring cover (0.75K to 30K) is not compatible.
FR-F500 series
FR-F700 series
(Note that the relay output 2 (A2, B2, C2) specific for the FR-F700 series can not be used with the FR-F500 series
terminals.)
(3) Instructions for continuous use of the FR-PU04 (parameter unit)
1) For the FR-F700 series, many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting these parameters, the
parameter name and setting range are not displayed. Parameter list, change list, initial value list, initial value list
2 and parameter clear of the HELP function can not be used.
2) For the FR-F700 series, many protective functions have been added. These functions activate, but all faults are
displayed as "Fault 14". When the faults history has been checked, "E.14" appears. Added faults display will not
appear on the parameter unit.
3) User initial value setting can not be used.
4) User registration/clear (user group 2) can not be used.
5) Parameter copy/verification function can not be used.
151
For customers who are replacing the conventional model with this inverter
(4) Main differences and compatibilities with the FR-F500(L) series
Item
FR-F500(L)
FR-F700
Simple mode parameters 61
Simple mode parameters 15
Pr. 0 Torque boost initial value
initial value
11K to 37K: 2%, 45K, 55K: 1.5%
Pr. 0 Torque boost initial value
(When the torque boost value of the FR-F500 series used
11K to 55K: 2%
was the initial value, it is not necessary to change the
torque boost value from the initial value when replacing
with the FR-F700 series.)
User group (16) only
User group 1 (16), user group 2 (16)
Setting methods were partially changed
(Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 175)
(Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 173)
"User initial value setting" (Pr. 199) was cleared
User initial value setting (Pr. 199)
Substitutable with the copy function of the operation panel
(FR-DU07)
Changed/cleared
DC injection brake function with terminal (X13
DC injection brake function with terminal was cleared
functions
signal)
Start in reverse rotation is possible with flying start function
(Pr. 11 setting value 8888, Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 setting (frequency search of automatic restart after instantaneous
value 13)
power failure function)
Long wiring mode
Setting is not necessary
(Pr. 240 setting 10, 11)
(Pr. 240 settings "10" and "11" were cleared)
Function was cleared
Intelligent optimum acceleration/deceleration
For deceleration time, overvoltage fault can be avoided
(Pr. 60 setting "3" and Pr. 61 to Pr. 63)
with regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 885).
Automatic torque boost
Automatic torque boost was cleared because of addition of
(Pr. 38, Pr. 39)
"Simple magnetic flux vector" (Pr. 80)
Performing parameter clear and all clear (H5A96,
Pr. 345 and Pr. 346 are not cleared.
HAA99) with the FR-A7ND clears Pr. 345 and Pr. 346.
Removable terminal block
Terminal block Removable terminal block
Upward compatibility (Terminal block of the F500 can be
mounted)
FR-PU07
FR-DU07
PU
FR-PU04, DU04
FR-DU04 unavailable (Partly restricted when the FR-PU04
is used. Refer to page 151.)
Dedicated plug-in option (not compatible)
Computer link, relay output option
Built into the inverter
Plug-in option
FR-A5NR
(RS-485 terminal, relay output 2 points)
Three boards can be mounted
One board can be mounted
FR-F720-0.75K, 2.2K, 3.7K, 7.5K, 18.5K, 22K, 37K, 45K,
Installation size
FR-F740-0.75K to 3.7K, 7.5K, 22K, 37K to 55K are compatible in mounting dimensions
For other capacities, an optional intercompatibility attachment (FR-AAT) is necessary.
Appendix 1-2 Replacement of the FR-A100 <EXCELENT> series
Instructions for installation
• When using the installation holes of the FR-A100(E) series, FR-A5AT (intercompatibility attachment) is necessary.
152
Appendix 2 Instructions for UL and cUL compliance
(Conforming standard UL 508C, CSA C22.2 No.14)
(1) Installation
This inverter is a UL / cUL Listed, enclosed type device with a suitably rated enclosure.
Design an enclosure so that the inverter surrounding air temperature, humidity and atmosphere satisfy the
specifications.
(Refer to page 136.)
Precaution
The bus capacitor discharge time is 10 minutes. Before starting wiring or inspection, switch power off, wait for more
than 10 minutes, and check for residual voltage between terminal P/+ and N/- with a meter etc., to avoid a hazard of
electrical shock.
Wiring protection
For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National
Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code
and any applicable provincial codes.
Provide the appropriate UL and cUL listed Class RK5, Class T or Class L type fuse or UL489 molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) that is suitable for branch circuit protection in accordance with the table below.
Note, the Class L fuses can be used if the applicable current rating is larger than 600 A.
FR-F720-††K
Rated fuse voltage(V)
Fuse
Without power factor
maximum improving reactor
allowable With power factor
rating (A)* improving reactor
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
240V or more
15
20
30
40
60
80
150
175
200
225
300
350
400
500
15
20
20
30
50
70
125
150
200
200
250
300
350
400
Molded case circuit breaker
(MCCB)
Maximum allowable rating (A)*
15
15
20
35
50
70
100
125
175
200
250
350
400
500
FR-F720-††K
75
90
110
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
Rated fuse voltage(V)
Fuse
Without power factor
maximum improving reactor
allowable With power factor
rating (A)* improving reactor
240V or more
⎯
⎯
⎯
500
600
700
Molded case circuit breaker
(MCCB)
Maximum allowable rating (A)*
700
800
1000
FR-F740-††K
0.75
1.5
2.2
Rated fuse voltage(V)
Fuse
Without power factor
maximum improving reactor
480V or more
6
10
15
20
30
40
70
80
90
110
150
175
200
250
6
10
10
15
25
35
60
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
Molded case circuit breaker
(MCCB)
Maximum allowable rating (A)*
15
15
15
15
25
40
50
70
80
100
125
175
200
250
FR-F740-††K
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
allowable
rating (A)*
With power factor
improving reactor
Rated fuse voltage(V)
Fuse
maximum
allowable
rating (A)*
500V or more
Without power factor
improving reactor
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
With power factor
improving reactor
250
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
900
350
450
500
650
800
800
1000 1200 1200 1200 1600 1600 2000 2000 2500
Molded case circuit breaker
(MCCB)
Maximum allowable rating (A)*
1000 1100 1200 1350 1500 1800
* Maximum allowable rating by US National Electrical Code.
Exact size must be chosen for each installation.
153
(2) Wiring of the power supply and motor
For wiring the input (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and output (U, V, W) terminals of the inverter, use the UL Listed copper, stranded
wires (rated at 75°C) and round crimping terminals. Crimp the crimping terminals with the crimping tool recommended
by the terminal maker.
(3) Short circuit ratings
• 200V class
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 100kA rms Symmetrical Amperes, 264V Maximum.
• 400V class
55K or less
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 100kA rms Symmetrical Amperes, 528V Maximum.
75K or more
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 100kA rms Symmetrical Amperes, 550V Maximum.
(4) Motor overload protection
Operation time (min)
3
3
Characteristic when
electronic thermal relay
function for motor
protection is turned off
(When Pr. 9 setting is 0(A))
240
Operation time (s)
(s) unit display in this range
(min) unit display in
this range
This inverter is certified as a motor overload protection device by UL.
When using the electronic thermal relay function as motor overload protection, set the rated motor current to Pr. 9
Electronic thermal O/L relay.
Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic
This function detects the overload (overheat) of the
Pr. 9 = 50% setting of
Pr. 9 = 100% setting
motor, stops the operation of the inverter's output
inverter rating*1.2
of inverter rating*1.2
transistor, and stops the output. (The operation
characteristic is shown on the left)
70
30Hz or more*
30Hz
20Hz
⋅ When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
or more*
Operation range
Range on the right of
10Hz
20Hz
1) Set "1" in Pr. 71. (This provides a 100% continuous torque
60
characteristic
curve
10Hz
6Hz
Non-operation range
characteristic in the low-speed range.)
6Hz
Range on the left of
0.5Hz
characteristic curve
50 0.5Hz
2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.
180
*1
120
Electronic thermal relay
function for transistor
protection
60
52.5%
105%
100 120
50
150
Inverter output current (%)
(% to the rated output current)
*2
*3
When 50% of the inverter rated output current (current value) is set
in Pr. 9
The % value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated output current.
It is not the percentage to the motor rated current.
When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies
to operation at 6Hz or higher.
CAUTION
⋅ Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid
unnecessary reset and power-off.
⋅ When multiple motors are operated by a single inverter, protection cannot be provided by the electronic thermal relay function.
Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
⋅ When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
⋅ A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use the external thermal relay.
⋅ Electronic thermal relay may not function when 5% or less of inverter rated current is set to electronic thermal relay setting.
154
Appendix 3 Instructions for compliance with the EU Directives
The EU Directives are issued to standardize different national regulations of the EU Member States and to facilitate free movement of the
equipment, whose safety is ensured, in the EU territory.
Since 1996, compliance with the EMC Directive that is one of the EU Directives has been legally required. Since 1997, compliance with the
Low Voltage Directive, another EU Directive, has been also legally required. When a manufacturer confirms its equipment to be compliant
with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive, the manufacturer must declare the conformity and affix the CE marking.
z The authorized representative in the EU
The authorized representative in the EU is shown below.
Name: Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV
Address: Gothaer strase 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany
z Note
We declare that this inverter conforms with the EMC Directive in industrial environments and affix the CE marking on the inverter. When
using the inverter in a residential area, take appropriate measures and ensure the conformity of the inverter used in the residential area.
(1) EMC Directive
We declare that this inverter conforms with the EMC Directive and affix the CE marking on the inverter.
y EMC Directive: 2004/108/EC
y Standard(s): EN61800-3:2004 (Second environment / PDS Category "C3")
Note: First environment
Environment including residential buildings. Includes buildings directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power
supply network which supplies power to residential buildings.
Second environment
Environment including all buildings except buildings directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power supply
network which supplies power to residential buildings.
z Note
Set the EMC filter valid and install the inverter and perform wiring according to the following instructions.
* The inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter. Set the EMC filter valid. (The EMC filter is invalid when shipped from the factory. (The
FR-F720-0.75K and 1.5K are always valid.) For details, refer to page 9.)
* Connect the inverter to an earthed power supply.
* Install a motor and a control cable according to the instructions written in the EMC Installation Guidelines (BCN-A21041-204).
* The cable length between the inverter and the motor is 5 m maximum.
* Confirm that the final integrated system with the inverter conforms with the EMC Directive.
155
(2) Low Voltage Directive
We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage Directive (Conforming standard EN 50178) and affix the CE
mark on the inverters.
Outline of instructions
* Do not use an earth leakage current breaker as an electric shock protector without connecting the equipment to the earth. Connect the
equipment to the earth securely.
* Wire the earth terminal independently. (Do not connect two or more cables to one terminal.)
* Use the cable sizes on page 14 under the following conditions.
⋅ Surrounding air temperature: 40°C maximum
If conditions are different from above, select appropriate wire according to EN60204 Appendix C TABLE 5.
* Use a tinned (plating should not include zinc) crimping terminal to connect the earth (ground) cable. When tightening the screw, be
careful not to damage the threads.
For use as a product compliant with the Low Voltage Directive, use PVC cable whose size is indicated on page 14.
* Use the moulded case circuit breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or IEC Standard.
* When using an earth leakage current breaker, use a residual current operated protective device (RCD) of type B (breaker which can
detect both AC and DC). If not, provide double or reinforced insulation between the inverter and other equipment, or put a transformer
between the main power supply and inverter.
* Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II (usable regardless of the earth (ground) condition of the power supply),
overvoltage category III (usable with the earthed-neutral system power supply, 400V class only) and pollution degree 2 or lower
specified in IEC664.
⋅ To use the inverter of 37K or more (IP00) under the conditions of pollution degree 2, install it in the enclosure of IP 2X or higher.
⋅ To use the inverter under the conditions of pollution degree 3, install it in the enclosure of IP54 or higher.
⋅ To use the inverter of 30K or less (IP20) outside of an enclosure in the environment of pollution degree 2, fix a fan cover with fan
cover fixing screws enclosed.
Fan cover
fixing screw
Fan cover
fixing screws
Fan cover
fixing screw
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan
Fan
FR-F720-2.2K to 5.5K
FR-F740-3.7K, 5.5K
FR-F720-7.5K to 15K
FR-F740-7.5K to 18.5K
Fan
FR-F720-18.5K to 30K
FR-F740-22K, 30K
* On the input and output of the inverter, use cables of the type and size set forth in EN60204 Appendix C.
* The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2) should be 30VDC, 0.3A. (Relay output has basic
isolation from the inverter internal circuit.)
* Control circuit terminals on page 8 are safely isolated from the main circuit.
* Environment
Surrounding air
temperature
Ambient humidity
Maximum altitude
During Operation
In Storage
During Transportation
-10°C to +50°C
-20°C to +65°C
-20°C to +65°C
90% RH or less
1000m
90% RH or less
1000m
90% RH or less
10000m
Details are given in the technical information "Low Voltage Directive Conformance Guide" (BCN-A21041-203). Please contact your sales
representative.
156
MEMO
157
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date
*
Revision
Manual Number
Dec. 2003
Mar. 2004
IB(NA)-0600176ENG-A
IB(NA)-0600176ENG-B
First edition
Jun. 2004
IB(NA)-0600176ENG-C
Additions
FR-F740-75K, 90K
Oct. 2004
IB(NA)-0600176ENG-D
Additions
FR-F740-0.75K to 30K
Additions
⋅ FR-F720 - 0.75K to 55K
⋅ FR-F740 - 110K to 160K
⋅ Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting
Mar. 2005
IB(NA)-0600176ENG-E
Additions
⋅ FR-F720 - 75K to 110K
⋅ FR-F740 - 185K to 560K
Jul. 2006
IB(NA)-0600176ENG-F
Additions
⋅ Pr. 539 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval
⋅ Voltage/current input switch
⋅ Setting value "2" of Pr. 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection
Oct. 2007
IB(NA)-0600176ENG-G
Additions
Additional explanation to "Causes and Corrective Actions"
⋅ Setting values "10, 11" of Pr. 495 Remote output selection
⋅ Partial review of Instructions for UL and cUL Compliance
Partial changes
⋅ Replacement procedure of the cooling fun of FR-F740-185K or more
Sep. 2009
IB(NA)-0600176ENG-H
Additions
・ Pr. 59 Remote function selection setting value "11 ", "12 ", "13 "
・ Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection setting value "6"
・ Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection setting value "10", "11", "20", "21"
・ Pr.128 PID action selection setting value "110", "111", "120", "121"
・ Pr.167 Output current detection operation selection setting value "10", "11"
・ Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection setting value "21", "22"
・ Pr.522 Output stop frequency
・ Pr.653 Speed smoothing control, Pr.654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency
・ Pr.553 PID deviation limit, Pr.554 PID signal operation selection, C42 (Pr.934) PID
display bias coefficient, C43 (Pr.934) PID display bias analog value, C44 (Pr.935) PID
display gain coefficient, C45 (Pr.935) PID display gain analog value
・ Pr.799 Pulse increment setting for output power
・ DC feeding operation permission signal (X70), DC feeding cancel signal
(X71), PID integral value reset signal (X72)
・ PID deviation limit signal (Y48), Pulse output of output power signal (Y79),
DC feeding signal (Y85)
Partial changes
・ Pr.153 Zero current detection time setting range "0 to 10s"
・ 5.5 Check first when you have a trouble
・ Appendix 3 Instructions for compliance with the EU Directives
For Maximum Safety
• Mitsubishi inverters are not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that
can affect or endanger human life.
• When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in
passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating
applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly advised
to install safety devices to prevent serious accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the
product are likely to cause a serious accident.
• Please do not use this product for loads other than three-phase induction motors.
158
IB(NA)-0600176ENG-H